0% found this document useful (0 votes)
7 views149 pages

May Say

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1/ 149

1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.

User Manual
Ichill 260L_D DUO
Ichill 261L_D DUO
(Firmware version 1.9)

Pag. 1 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

INDEX
1. GENERAL FEATURES .............................................................................................. 8

1.1 Main Function ................................................................................................................................................ 8

2. ICHILL 260/261L_D FEATURES ............................................................................. 10

3. USER INTERFACE .................................................................................................. 11

4. REMOTE KEYBOARD ............................................................................................. 15

5. FIRST INSTALLING ................................................................................................. 15

6. WIRING CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................... 16

7. ANALOG AND DIGITAL OUTPUT CONFIGURATION ........................................... 26

8. PROGRAMMING WITH THE “HOT KEY 64” ......................................................... 31

9. PROGRAMMING USING THE KEYBOARD ............................................................ 31

10. CHILLER / HEAT PUMP SELECTION ..................................................................... 36

11. HOW TO SWITCH ON / SWITCH OFF THE UNIT ................................................... 37

12. SWITCH ON / SWITCH OFF THE CONDENSING UNIT BY DIGITAL INPUT......... 37

13. DISPLAY LAYOUT................................................................................................... 38

14. DISPLAY CONFIGURATION ................................................................................... 39

15. DISPLAY INFORMATION ........................................................................................ 41

16. FUNCTION MENU “ M” KEY ................................................................................... 42


16.1.1 Compressor overload alarm; manual reset ................................................................................................43
16.1.2 Compressor overload alarm; manual reset with password .........................................................................43

17. ENERGY SAVING .................................................................................................... 48

17.1 Energy Saving Activation By Digital Input ..................................................................................................48

17.2 Energy Saving Time Table With Rtc ............................................................................................................48

18. DYNAMIC SETPOINT .............................................................................................. 49

Pag. 2 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

19. COMPRESSOR REGULATION ............................................................................... 51

19.1 Compressor Security Time ...........................................................................................................................51

20. CHILLER / HEAT PUMP REGULATION .................................................................. 51

20.1 Parameter Description ..................................................................................................................................51

20.2 Proportional Regulation ...............................................................................................................................52

20.3 Neutral Zone Regulation...............................................................................................................................53

21. COMPRESSORS MANAGEMENT........................................................................... 54

21.1 Compressors Start- Up .................................................................................................................................54

22. COMPRESSORS ROTATION .................................................................................. 56

23. CAPACITY STEP CONTROL................................................................................... 56

23.1 Minimum Load Start- Up .............................................................................................................................58

23.2 Intermittent Solenoid Valve for Screw Compressor ....................................................................................58

24. COMPRESSOR INVERTER CONTROLLED ........................................................... 58

24.1 Inverter Compressor In Heat Pump And External Temperature ...............................................................62

25. COMPRESSOR RACK ............................................................................................. 62

26. COMPRESSORS WITH DIFFERENT CAPACITY ................................................... 63

27. CIRCUIT MANAGEMENT: SATURATION OR BALANCING .................................. 64

28. PUMP DOWN ........................................................................................................... 64

29. UNLOADING ............................................................................................................ 66

29.1 High Temperature Of The Evaporator Water Inlet ....................................................................................66

29.2 Condenser High Pressure, Condenser High Temperature Or Evaporator Low Pressure ..........................66

29.3 Low Temperature Of The Evaporator Water Outlet...................................................................................67

30. SOLENOID VALVE FOR LIQUID INJECTION......................................................... 67

31. EVAPORATOR WATER PUMP / SUPPLY FAN (AIR/AIR UNIT)............................ 67

31.1 Evaporator Pump Group ..............................................................................................................................68

31.2 Modulating Evaporator Water Pump ..........................................................................................................68

Pag. 3 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

32. WATER PUMP OF THE CONDENSER ................................................................... 69

32.1 Condenser Pump Group ...............................................................................................................................70

33. CYCLIC OPERATION OF THE WATER PUMPS .................................................... 70

34. HOT START ............................................................................................................. 71

35. LOAD MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................ 71

36. CONDENSER FAN REGULATION .......................................................................... 71

36.1 Output Step Rele’ Condenser Fan ................................................................................................................72

36.2 Pwm Output For Fan Control ......................................................................................................................73

36.3 Condensing Unit: Common Or Separate Condenser ...................................................................................73

36.4 Proportional Regulation Of Condenser Fans ...............................................................................................73

36.5 On/Off Regulation Of Condenser Fans ........................................................................................................74

36.6 Pre-Ventilation And Post-Ventilation...........................................................................................................74

37. ANTI FREEZE HEATERS, INTEGRATION HEATING OR BOILER ........................ 75

38. AUXILIARY RELAYS ............................................................................................... 77

39. AUXILIARY PROPORTIONAL OUTPUTS ............................................................... 78

40. DEFROST CYCLE.................................................................................................... 81

40.1 Automatic Defrost Procedure .......................................................................................................................81

40.2 Other Information About The Defrost .........................................................................................................82

40.3 Forced Defrost ..............................................................................................................................................83

40.4 Combined Defrost .........................................................................................................................................83

40.5 Manual Defrost .............................................................................................................................................83

40.6 Defrost In Unit With Two Circuits ...............................................................................................................83


40.6.1 Start defrost in unit with common condenser............................................................................................83
40.6.2 End defrost in unit with two condenser ....................................................................................................83

40.7 Defrost With Condenser Fan Procedure ......................................................................................................84

40.8 Defrost Parameter Description .....................................................................................................................84

40.9 Defrost Dynamic Set Point ............................................................................................................................86

41. PRODUCTION OF SANITARY HOT WATER .......................................................... 87

Pag. 4 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

41.1 Anti-Legionella Function ..............................................................................................................................89

41.2 Water Pumps Management ..........................................................................................................................90

41.3 Sanitary Water Second Set Point .................................................................................................................91

41.4 Sanitary Hot Water Production: Valves In Water Circuit ___ Fs01=1 (Air/Water, Water/Water Unit) ...91
41.4.1 - Sanitary hot water operation when the unit is producing hot water .........................................................91
41.4.2 - Sanitary hot water operation when the unit is producing cold water ........................................................92

41.5 Sanitary Hot Water Production: Valves In Gas Circuit ___ Fs01=2 (Air/Water, Water/Water Unit) .......92
41.5.1 Sanitary hot water operation when the unit is producing hot water ............................................................92
41.5.2 - Sanitary hot water operation when the unit is producing cold water ........................................................92

42. SOLAR PANEL MANAGEMENT ............................................................................. 94

42.1 Solar Panel In Sanitary Hot Water ..............................................................................................................94

42.2 Solar Panel In Heating Mode........................................................................................................................94

43. UNIT WITH HYBRID EXCHANGERS (AIR / WATER UNIT).................................... 95

44. GEOTHERMAL FREE COOLING ............................................................................ 96

44.1 Fan speed control if compressors and free cooling are used for cooling (CF97=3)......................................98

45. RECOVERY FUNCTION .......................................................................................... 98

45.1 Unit With Two Separate Idraulic Circuits ...................................................................................................98

45.2 Unit With Two Idraulic Circuit Working In Parallel ..................................................................................99

46. CONDENSER TEMPERAURE / PRESURE CONDITION TO ENABLE/DISABLE


THE RECOVERY CYCLE ............................................................................................... 100

46.1 Recovery Disabled....................................................................................................................................... 100

46.2 Recovery Enabled ....................................................................................................................................... 101

46.3 Note About Recovery Enabled/Disabled .................................................................................................... 101

47. OPERATION RELATED TO THE REAL TIME CLOCK ......................................... 101

47.1 Real Time Clock Disabled By Digital Input ............................................................................................... 101

47.2 “Only supply fan” working mode” ............................................................................................................. 101

48. MESSAGES - ALARM CODES ............................................................................. 101

48.1 Automatic / Manual Alarm Description ..................................................................................................... 101

C1Pd - C2Pd – compressor oil differential pressure.............................................................................................. 115

49. AUTOMATIC TO MANUAL ALARM PROCEDURE .............................................. 120

Pag. 5 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

49.1 Alarm .......................................................................................................................................................... 121

49.2 Alarm: Circuit Alarm ................................................................................................................................. 122

49.3 Alarm: Compressor Alarm......................................................................................................................... 123

50. TABLE OF THE PARAMETERS ............................................................................ 124

51. BLACK-OUT........................................................................................................... 145

52. INSTALLING AND MOUNTING ............................................................................. 145

52.1 ICHILL 200 L FORMAT: Panel cut- out .................................................................................................. 145

52.2 ICHILL 200 L FORMAT: metal front frame ............................................................................................ 145

52.3 Ichill 200 Din Format SERIES ................................................................................................................... 146

52.4 Vertical boards Vi620 – panel cut-out ........................................................................................................ 146

53. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS .............................................................................. 147

54. ACCESSORIES ...................................................................................................... 147

55. TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................ 149

Pag. 6 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

General advice
PLEASE READ BEFORE USING THIS MANUAL
 This manual is part of the product and should be kept near the instrument for easy and quick reference.
 The instrument shall not be used for purposes different from those described hereunder. It cannot be
used as a safety device.
 Check the application limits before proceeding
 The technical data and information in the user manual could change without obligation to notice.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
 Check the supply voltage is correct before connecting the instrument.
 Do not expose to water or moisture: use the controller only within the operating limits avoiding sudden
temperature changes with high atmospheric humidity to prevent formation of condensation
 Warning: disconnect all electrical connections before any kind of maintenance.
 The instrument must not be opened.
 In case of failure or faulty operation send the instrument back to the distributor or to “Dixell company with
a detailed description of the fault.
 Consider the maximum current which can be applied to each relay (see Technical Data).
 Ensure that the wires for probes, loads and the power supply are separated and far enough from each
other, without crossing or intertwining.
 Fit the probe where it is not accessible by the end user.
 In case of applications in industrial environments, the use of mains filters (our mod. FT1) in parallel with
inductive loads could be useful.

Pag. 7 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

1. GENERAL FEATURES
IC260L_D/261L_D is an electronic controller for chiller unit applications having one or two circuits:
 Air/air
 Air/water
 Water/water
 Condensing unit

Additional features :
 Heat pump with gas reversibility

1.1 MAIN FUNCTION


Chiller management:
 One circuit up to 4 compressors
 Double circuit up to 6 compressors
 Screw compressors
Compressor start up:
 Direct
 Part winding
 Star - delta
Capacity step control:
 Continuous control
 Step control
 Modulation control (screw compressors)
Regulation of the compressors
 Working hour trade-off
 Start-up trade-off
Management of two pump groups
 2 pumps evaporator side
 2 pumps condenser side
Pump down management
 With dedicated pressure switch
 Low pressure switch
 Low pressure transducer
Unloading circuit
 High temperature of the evaporator inlet water
 High temperature of the condenser inlet water (unit with recovery)
 High condensing pressure
 Low evaporating pressure
Maintenance messages
 Compressors
 Evaporator pumps
 Condenser pumps
Auxiliary relays
 It is possible to configure two relays with indipendent regulation
Weekly Energy saving
 Three different time bands per day (only if RTC onboard)
 Energy saving enabled by digital input
Weekly ON/OFF:
 Three different time bands per day (only if RTC onboard)
Dynamic setpoint:
 It is possible to modify the set point according to outside temperature or a dedicated 4..20mA probe
Change over :
 Automatic operative mode selection (chiller / heat pump) maccording to outside temperature
Defrost management:
 Combined control temperature / pressure

Pag. 8 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

 Forced defrost
 Different way to enable the defrost (temperature / pressure / digital input)
Boiler:
 For heating integration
Two proportional outputs for condensing fan speed control (inverter or phase cut) with configurable
signal:
 PWM
 0÷10Volt
 4÷20mA
Four proportional control outputs 0÷10V or ON/OFF
 To control the dumper
 To control an external relay
Complete alarm management
 Internal Data logger up to 100 events
Supervisor / monitoring
 TTL output for XJ485 interface (ModBus protocol) for XWEB Dixell monitoring system

Pag. 9 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

2. ICHILL 260/261L_D FEATURES

FEATURES IC290D IC291D


OUTPUT RELAYS
10 
14 
DIGITAL INPUTS
18 configurable configurable
PROBE INPUTS
6 (NTC/PTC) configurable configurable
4 (NTC/PTC/0..5V/4..20mA) configurable configurable
PROPORTIONAL OUTPUTS
2 PWM outputs for condensing fan  
2 0÷10V or 4÷20mA for condensing fan configurable configurable
4 0÷10V configurable configurable
OTHER OUTPUTS
TTL  
Output for remote keyboard VGI890  
POWER SUPPLY
12 Vac/dc (+15%;-10%)  
24 Vac/dc (± 10%) opt opt
OTHERS
Internal RTC opt opt
Buzzer opt opt

 configurable = configurable by parameter


 opt = optional
  = default

Pag. 10 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

3. USER INTERFACE
Meaning of the LEDs

IC260L / IC261L models

IC260L / IC261L metal front panel

Pag. 11 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

Meaning of the leds on the models VI620 - VI620S remote keyboard

KEY FUNCTION

KEY ACTION FUNCTION


Push and release Show chiller set point SetC and heat pump SetH
In chiller or heat pump if the Energy saving or the
Push once Dynamic setpoint are enabled it shows the real
setpoint Setr, the led is blinking.
Push for 3 seconds the release Change between chiller / heat pump
During the programming: push one
Select a parameter or confirm a value
time
Push once with probe label Change between the read-out of the circuit 1 and the
showed on the bottom display circuit 2 and viceversa
Push once Select the readings of the first circuit
Pushing once during the
To change the parameter code or value
programming
Push for 1 second during the 1 time shows the Pr2 programming level
UP KEY programming 2 time shows the Pr3 programming level
Push once Select the readings of the second circuit

Pushing one time during the


To change the parameter code or value
programming
TASTO DOWN

Pag. 12 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User Manual IC200L/D DUO rel 1.0

Turn the chiller on, if the unit is on led is on


Push once The led is blinking if there is a power on delay or
during the pump down

Turn the heat pump on, if the unit is on led is on


Push once The led is blinking if there is a power on delay or
during the pump down

Push once enter the function Menu


Push for 3 seconds To set RTC parameters (if the RTC is inside)
Pushing once during the
To exit from a group of parameter
programming

KEY COMBINANTION

KEY ACTION FUNCTION


Push for 3 seconds together Enter the programming

In Pr3 level: push SET and the


Select the parameter level visibility Pr1 / Pr2 / Pr3
push DOWN key

Push once together Exit the programming

Push 5 seconds (heat pump


Manual defrost
with ok condition)

In Pr3 programming level Push In Pr3 defines if the parameter can be changed
SET and then the MENU key or not in the other levels.

LED and ICONS

ICON LED FUNCTION


ON Auxiliary relay #1 active
OFF Auxiliary relay #1 not active

ON Auxiliary relay #2 active

OFF Auxiliary relay #2 not active


BLINKING Defrost delay counting active
ON Defrost
OFF Defrost end

Display and Icons

ICON MEANING / FUNCTIONNING

Pag. 13 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Celsius degrees: ON for temperature measurements of probe values or parameters

Fahrenheit degrees: ON for temperature measurements of probe values or parameters

Bar: ON for pressure measurements of probe values, setpoint or parameters

PSI Psi: ON for pressure measurements of probe values, setpoint or parameters

ON = compressor 1 active
Blinking = compressor 1 delay counting

ON = compressor 2 active
Blinking = compressor 2 delay counting

ON = compressor 3 active
Blinking = compressor 3 delay counting

ON = compressor 4 active
Blinking = compressor 4 delay counting

ON = compressor 5 active
Blinking = compressor 5 delay counting

ON = compressor 6 active
Blinking = compressor 6 delay counting

General alarm: blinking if there is an alarm not identified by an icon

Anti freeze heaters/ integration heating / boiler: ON if the output is on

Flow alarm/ (differential) pressure switch / supply fan thermal (air / air unit) : is blinking if
the configuration of the digital input is active
Real time clock: On when the bottom display show the RTC
ON during the programming with time based parameter value
In function menu indicates the defrost delay counting

Water pump: On if at least one of the four configurable pump group is on

Condenser fan: ON if at least one of the PWM or relay outputs for fan control is active

Pag. 14 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Meaningg of the bottom display led

Led # 1 – 2 (With RTC)


If the bottom display shows the RTC the 1 and 2 leds are blinking.

Led # 1 – 2 In function Menu


During the time counting to the next defrost for one or both circuits the led 1 and 2 are blinking.

LED Parameter programming


In Pr2 level: led #3 indicates the visibility while the #1 and #2 show if the parameter can be modified or not.
In Pr3 level: led #3 and #4 indicate the visibility while the #1 and #2 show if the parameter can be modified or
not.

4. REMOTE KEYBOARD
The IC200L/D can be connected with 2 remote keyboard.
The remote keyboard can have the NTC probe on board that is used to show the room temperature and also
to control the temperature regulation.
To connect the remote keyboard it is necessary to use shielded cable for a maximum lenght of 150mt. In
case of no communication between the instrument and the remote keyboard the display shows “noL” (no
link).
Mod. VI620 – standard keyboard
Mod VI620S – keyboard with internal temperature probe
Use the connection cable CAB/CJ30 (2x0.2 mm2) to interface the IC connector to the shielded wire.

5. FIRST INSTALLING
On Board Clock (Optional)
Giving power supply the bottom display shows “rtC” alternated with a temperature or pressure value: It is
necessary to set the RTC.
If the probes are not connected the display shows the corresponding probe alarm messages. In this situation
the RTC setup and the programming are available.
ATTENTION
The RTC function is an optional and it is not possible to update the instrument but it is necessary to
order the instrument already complete of this features.
With power failure the RTC back-up battery maximum duration is 1 week. After this period it is necessary to
setup the clock again.

Real Time Clock Setup


1. Push M key for 3 seconds until the bottom display shows “Hour” and the top display shows its value.
2. Push SET one time: the value is blinking.
3. Use the Up and Down keys to adjust it. Push SET one time to confirm; automatically the display shows
next parameter.
4. Repeat the operations 2. 3. and 4. for all the RTC parameters:
- Min: minutes (0÷60)
- UdAy: day of the week (Sun = Sunday, Mon =Monday, tuE =Tuesday, UEd = Wednesday, tHu =
Thursday, Fri =Friday, SAt =Saturday)

Pag. 15 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

- dAy: day of the month (0÷31)


- MntH: month (1÷12)
- yEAr: year (00÷99)

6. WIRING CONNECTIONS
Ichill 260L
10 relays
18 digital inputs (free of voltage)
10 analogue inputs: NTC probes or through configuration 6 NTC / PTC and 4 pressure transducer 4÷20mA
or ratio-metric 0÷ 5.0Volt
6 modulating outputs
1 output for remote panel (max 2 remote panels)
1 TTL output for “Hot Key 64” connection or for XJ485, interface module for monitoring system, connection.
MAX current on the relay contacts relè 5(2)A 250V - MAX common current 12A 250V

Ichill 261L
14 relays
18 digital inputs (free of voltage)
10 analogue inputs: NTC probes or through configuration 6 NTC / PTC and 4 pressure transducer 4÷20mA
or ratio-metric 0÷ 5.0Volt
6 modulating outputs
1 output for remote panel (max 2 remote panels)
1 TTL output for “Hot Key 64” connection or for XJ485, interface module for monitoring system, connection.
MAX current on the relay contacts relè 5(2)A 250V - MAX common current 12A 250V

Pag. 16 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Ichill 260D
10 digital outputs (relays)
18 digital inputs (free of voltage)
10 analogue inputs: NTC probes or through configuration 6 NTC / PTC and 4 pressure transducer 4÷20mA
or ratio-metric 0÷ 5.0Volt
6 modulating outputs
1 output for remote panel (max 2 remote panels)
1 TTL output for “Hot Key 64” connection
1 RS485 output with modbus RTU protocol for monitoring system, connection.
MAX current on the relay contacts relè 5(2)A 250V - MAX common current 12A 250V

Ichill 261D
14 digital outputs (relays)
18 digital inputs (free of voltage)
10 analogue inputs: NTC probes or through configuration 6 NTC / PTC and 4 pressure transducer 4÷20mA
or ratio-metric 0÷ 5.0Volt
6 modulating outputs
1 output for remote panel (max 2 remote panels)
1 TTL output for “Hot Key 64” connection
1 RS485 output with modbus RTU protocol for monitoring system.
MAX current on the relay contacts relè 5(2)A 250V - MAX common current 12A 250V

Pag. 17 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Temperature probes connection (NTC – PTC Probes)


Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L / IC260D and IC261D.
PbC = Probes common terminal

Digital Inputs
Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L / IC260D and IC261D.
GND = Digital inputs common terminal

Pag. 18 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Pressure Transducer connection (4 ÷ 20mA signal)


Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L / IC260D and IC261D.
12V = Pressure trasducers common terminal

Ratiometric Transducer connection (0 ÷ 5V signal)


Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L / IC260D and IC261D.

Pag. 19 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

PWM Output for Condensing Fan Speed Control


Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L / IC260D and IC261D.
The PWM signal has to be connected to the cut of phase controller:
Mod. XV05PK mono-phase , cut phase control 500 Watt (2A)
Mod. XV10PK mono-phase , cut phase control 1000 Watt (4A)
Mod. XV22PK mono-phase , cut phase control 2200 Watt (9A)

Condensing Fan control: 0 ÷ 10Vdc signal


Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L / IC260D and IC261D.
In case of only one condensing circuit configured, the Out1 / Out2 outputs work together giving the same
signal.

Pag. 20 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Condensing Fan Control: 4÷20mA signal


Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L / IC260D and IC261D.
In case of only one condensing circuit configured, the Out1 / Out2 outputs work together giving the same
signal.

Proportional outputs 0 ÷ 10V dumper control


Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L / IC260D and IC261D.

Pag. 21 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

If the dumper motor has a common pole for the 0..10V and the power supply, the connection has to be done
as showed below.
Ground connection has to be evaluated case per case.

Proportional outputs configured to manage an external relay


Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L / IC260D and IC261D.

Pag. 22 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Hot Key 64 Connection


Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L / IC260D and IC261D.
The programming HOT KEY 64 allows to upload or download a copy of the parameters of the instrument
(see HOT KEY paragraph).

XJ485 Connection
Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L .
The XJ485 interface is a converter between the RS485 and the TTL connector output. The RS485 uses two
terminals (+) and (-) that must be connected respecting the polarity to build the serial line. Use the
CAB/RS02 to connect the XJ485 interface to the TTL connector.

Pag. 23 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

RS485 connection (IC260D / IC261D)


The Ichill 260D and Ichill 261D have a RS 485 output to connect the controller to the ProgTool or a XWEB
(monitoring, controlling and supervising system).
Make attention to the polarity of the RS 485 signal.

Remote keyboard VI620


Connection diagram for IC260L / IC261L / IC260D and IC261D.
Using the remote panels provided with the ambient NTC probe the display measurement, and the control can
be managed directly by this probe.
Use shielded cable for the connection up to 150mt maximum. In case of communication failure the upper
display shows “noL” (no link).
Use the CAB/CJ30 to interface the ichill connector to the shielded cable.
It is possible to connect maximu 2 remote keyboard.

Pag. 24 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Pag. 25 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

7. ANALOG AND DIGITAL OUTPUT CONFIGURATION


Analog input Pb1 - Pb2 - Pb7 - Pb8 - Pb9 - Pb10

Parameters involved:
CF08 = Configuration PB1
CF09 = Configuration PB2
CF14 = Configuration PB7
CF15 = Configuration PB8
CF16 = Configuration PB9
CF17 = Configuration PB10
0. Not enabled
1. Temperature probe PTC for compressor 1 discharge
2. Temperature probe PTC for compressor 2 discharge
3. Temperature probe PTC for compressor 3 discharge
4. Temperature probe PTC for compressor 4 discharge
5. Temperature probe PTC for compressor 5 discharge
6. Temperature probe PTC for compressor 6 discharge
7. Temperature probe PTC for solar panel
8. Temperature probe NTC for evaporator inlet
9. Temperature probe NTC for evaporator 1 outlet
10. Temperature probe NTC for evaporator 2 outlet
11. Temperature probe NTC for common evaporator outlet
12. Temperature probe NTC for common hot water condenser / recovery inlet
13. Temperature probe NTC for hot water of the condenser / recovery circuit 1 inlet
14. Temperature probe NTC for hot water of the condenser / recovery circuit 2 inlet
15. Temperature probe NTC for hot water of the condenser / recovery circuit 1 outlet
16. Temperature probe NTC for hot water of the condenser / recovery circuit 2 outlet
17. Temperature probe NTC for hot water of the condenser / recovery common outlet
18. Temperature probe NTC for free cooling water inlet circuit
19. Temperature probe NTC for dynamic setpoint external air / boiler / change over
20. Temperature probe NTC for combined defrost circuit 1
21. Temperature probe NTC for combined defrost circuit 2
22. Temperature probe NTC for auxiliary output 1
23. Temperature probe NTC for auxiliary output 2
24. Temperature probe NTC sanitary water 1
25. Temperature probe NTC sanitary water 1
26. Temperature probe NTC solar panel
27. Temperature probe NTC for condensing circuit 1
28. Temperature probe NTC for condensing circuit 2
After the number 28 the configuration can be selected from o 1 to c73 that allows to set an analogue input as
digital input (see polarity of the digital input/outputs).

Analog input Configuration Pb3 - Pb4 - Pb5 - Pb6


Parameter involved:
CF10 = Configuration PB3
CF11 = Configuration PB4
CF12 = Configuration PB5
CF13 = Configuration PB6
0 Not enabled
1 Temperature probe PTC for compressor 1 discharge
2 Temperature probe PTC for compressor 2 discharge
3 Temperature probe PTC for compressor 3 discharge
4 Temperature probe PTC for compressor 4 discharge
5 Temperature probe PTC for compressor 5 discharge
6 Temperature probe PTC for compressor 6 discharge
7 Temperature probe PTC for solar panel
8 Temperature probe NTC for evaporator inlet
9 Temperature probe NTC for evaporator outlet 1

Pag. 26 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

10 Temperature probe NTC for evaporator outlet 2


11 Temperature probe NTC for common evaporator outlet
12 Temperature probe NTC for common hot water condenser / recovery inlet
13 Temperature probe NTC for hot water condenser / recovery inlet circuit 1
14 Temperature probe NTC for hot water condenser / recovery inlet circuit 2
15 Temperature probe NTC for hot water condenser / recovery outlet circuit 1
16 Temperature probe NTC for hot water condenser / recovery outlet circuit 2
17 Temperature probe NTC for hot water condenser / recovery common outlet circuit
18 Temperature probe NTC for free cooling water inlet
19 Temperature probe NTC for external air dynamic setpoint/ boiler / change over
20 Temperature probe NTC for combined defrost circuit 1
21 Temperature probe NTC for free cooling water inlet 2
22 Temperature probe NTC for auxiliary output 1
23 Temperature probe NTC for auxiliary output 2
24 Temperature probe NTC sanitary water 1
25 Temperature probe NTC sanitary water 2
26 Temperature probe NTC solar panel
27 Condenser probe circuit 1 ( temperature NTC / pressure 4÷20 mA / ratio-metric 0÷ 5Volt )
28 Condenser probe circuit 2 ( temperature NTC / pressure 4÷20 mA / ratio-metric 0÷ 5Volt )
29 Evaporator pressure probe circuit 1 (pressure 4÷20 mA / ratio-metric 0÷ 5Volt )
30 Evaporator pressure probe circuit 1 (pressure 4÷20 mA / ratio-metric 0÷ 5Volt )
31 Aux 1 output probe control (4÷20 mA / ratio-metric 0÷ 5Volt)
32 Aux 2 output probe control (4÷20 mA / ratio-metric 0÷ 5Volt)
33 Dynamic setpoint probe (4÷20 mA)
34 Compressor 1 or circuit 1 pressure probe
35 Compressor 2 or circuit 2 pressure probe
After the number 35 the display read-out goes from “o 1” to “c73 that allows to set an analogue input as
digital input (see polarity input of digital inputs).

Digital Input Configuration Id1 – Id18


Parameters involved:
CF36 = Configuration ID1…CF53 = Configuration ID18
0. Not enabled
1. Remote ON / OFF
2. Remote chiller / heat pump
3. Flow switch/ Supply fan overload
4. Flow switch of heated side
5. Antifreeze heater circuit 1
6. Antifreeze heater circuit 2
7. High pressure switch circuit 1
8. High pressure switch circuit 2
9. Low pressure switch circuit 1
10. Low pressure switch circuit 2
11. Compressor 1 high pressure
12. Compressor 2 high pressure
13. Compressor 3 high pressure
14. Compressor 4 high pressure
15. Compressor 5 high pressure
16. Compressor 6 high pressure
17. Compressor 1 overload
18. Compressor 2 overload
19. Compressor 3 overload
20. Compressor 4 overload
21. Compressor 5 overload
22. Compressor 6 overload
23. Condenser fan overload of circuit 1
24. Condenser fan overload of circuit 2
25. Condenser fan overload of circuit 1 and 2 (comun)
26. Water pump overload of evaporator 1
27. Water support pump overload of evaporator
28. Water pump overload of condenser 1
29. Water support pump overload of condenser

Pag. 27 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

30. Recovery request circuit 1


31. Recovery request circuit 2
32. Start/End defrost circuit 1
33. Start/End defrost circuit 2
34. Energy Saving
35. Pressure switch / compressor 1 oil
36. Pressure switch / compressor 2 oil
37. Pressure switch / compressor 3 oil
38. Pressure switch / compressor 4 oil
39. Pressure switch / compressor 5 oil
40. Pressure switch / compressor 6 oil
41. Pump down pressure switch of circuit 1
42. Pump down pressure switch of circuit 2
43. Generic alarm from digital input with stop regulation n° 1
44. Generic alarm from digital input with stop or signal regulation n° 2
45. Operation working mode: by RTC or keyboard
46. Operation mode with supplay fan only
47. Digital input of thermoregulation request (condensing unit)
48. Digital input of cooling request (condensing unit)
49. Digital input of heating request (condensing unit)
50. Request step 2 (condensing unit)
51. Request step 3 (condensing unit)
52. Request step 4 (condensing unit)
53. Request step 5 (condensing unit)
54. Request step 6 (condensing unit)
55. Request step 7 (condensing unit)
56. Request step 8 (condensing unit)
57. Request step 9 (condensing unit)
58. Request step 10 (condensing unit)
59. Request step 11 (condensing unit)
60. Request step 12 (condensing unit)
61. Request step 13 (condensing unit)
62. Request step 14 (condensing unit)
63. Request step 15 (condensing unit)
64. Request step 16 (condensing unit)
65. Sanitary water flow switch
66. Solar panel flow switch
67. Only sanitary water
68. Sanitary water heaters overload
69. Sanitary water pump overload
70. Sanitary water second set point
71. Phase sequence alarm
72. Sanitary water priority
73. Free cooling water pump flow switch

Digital Output (relay) Configuration RL1- RL14


Parameter involved:
CF54= Configuration RL1…CF67= Configuration RL14
0. Not enabled
1. Alarm
2. Evaporator water pump / Supply fan
3. Support water pump of the evaporator
4. Anti-freeze heater / integration heating / boiler circuit 1
5. Anti-freeze heater / integration heating / boiler circuit 2
6. Water pump of the condenser recovery circuit
7. Support water pump of the condenser recovery circuit
8. 4-way valve for chiller / heat pump inversion of the circuit 1
9. 4-way valve for chiller / heat pump inversion of the circuit 2
10. 1° condenser fan step ON/OFF control of the circuit 1
11. 2° condenser fan step ON/OFF control of the circuit 1
12. 3° condenser fan step ON/OFF control of the circuit 1
13. 4° condenser fan step ON/OFF control of the circuit 1

Pag. 28 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

14. 1° condenser fan step ON/OFF control of the circuit 2


15. 2° condenser fan step ON/OFF control of the circuit 2
16. 3° condenser fan step ON/OFF control of the circuit 2
17. 4° condenser fan step ON/OFF control of the circuit 2
18. Solenoid valve of the pump-down circuit 1
19. Solenoid valve of the pump-down circuit 2
20. Recovery valve circuit 1
21. Recovery valve circuit 2
22. Free cooling ON/OFF valve
23. Auxiliary output circuit 1
24. Auxiliary output circuit 2
25. Solenoid valve Intermittent for screw compressor 1
26. Solenoid valve Intermittent for screw compressor 2
27. Solenoid valve of the liquid injection for compressor 1
28. Solenoid valve of the liquid injection for compressor 2
29. Sanitary valve 1
30. Sanitary valve 2
31. Sanitary heater 1
32. Sanitary heater 2
33. Sanitary heater 3
34. Solar panel water pump
35. Solar panel valve
36. Sanitary water pump
37. Hybrid exchanger 1 circuit 1
38. Hybrid exchanger 2 circuit 1
39. Hybrid exchanger 1 circuit 2
40. Hybrid exchanger 2 circuit 2
41. Defrost status
42. Chiller status
43. Heat pump status
44. Sanitary water status
45. STD-By status
46. Solenoid water valve circuit 1
47. Solenoid water valve circuit 2
48. Direct start-up : compressor 1 relay
PW start: relay PW 1 of the compressor 1
Star-delta start: relay line 1 of the compressor 1
49. PW start: relay PW 2 of the compressor 1
Star-delta start: relay linea 2 compressor 1
50. Star centre of the Star-delta start of the compressor 1
51. Capacity step valve 1 compressor 1
52. Capacity step valve 2 compressor 1
53. Capacity step valve 3 compressor 1
54. By-pass gas valve compressor 1start
55. Direct start: compressor 2 start
PW start: relay 1 of the compressor 2
Star-delta start: relay line 1 of the compressor 2
56. PW start: relay PW 2 of the compressor 2
Star-delta start: relay line 2 of the compressor 2
57. Star centre of the Star-delta start of the compressor 2
58. Capacity step valve 1 compressor 2
59. Capacity step valve 2 compressor 2
60. Capacity step valve 3 compressor 2
61. By-pass gas valve compressor 2 start
62. Direct start: compressor 3 relay
PW start: relay PW 1 of the compressor3
Star-delta start: relay line 1 of the compressor 3
63. PW start: relay PW 2 of the compressor 3
Star-delta start: relay line 1 of the compressor 3
64. Star centre of the Star-delta start of the compressor 3
65. Capacity step valve 1 compressor 3
66. Capacity step valve 2 compressor 3

Pag. 29 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

67. Capacity step valve 3 compressor 3


68. By-pass gas valve compressor 3 start
69. Direct start: compressor 4 relay
PW start: PW 1 of the compressor 4
Star-delta start: relay line 1 of the compressor 4
70. PW start: relay PW 2 of the compressor 4
Star-delta start: relay line 1 of the compressor 4
71. Star centre of the Star-delta start of the compressor 4
72. Capacity step valve 1 of the compressor 4
73. Capacity step valve 2 of the compressor 4
74. Capacity step valve 3 of the compressor 4
75. By-pass gas valve compressor 4 start
76. Compressor 5 relay
77. Compressor 6 relay

Condenser proportional control configuration (2 outputs)


Proportional outputs used to configure a proportional output signal to condenser fan control
Parameters involved:
CF68 = Condenser control configuration for circuit 1
CF69 = Condenser control configuration for circuit 2
0= 0 ÷ 10Vdc (for external mono or three-phase fan control board)
1= 4÷20mA (for external mono or three-phase fan control board)
2= PWM (only for external mono-phase fan control board with cut phase control)

Proportional output configuration 0 ÷ 10 Vdc (4 outputs)


Parameters involved:
CF70 = Proportional output 1 configuration
CF71 = Proportional output 2 configuration
CF72 = Proportional output 3 configuration
CF73 = Proportional output 4 configuration
0 Not enabled
1 Modulated evaporator water pump
2 Modulated Free cooling valve
3 not used
4 Auxiliary output 0÷10V n° 1
5 Auxiliary output 0÷10V n° 2
6 Proportional output for modulating compressor 1
7 Proportional output for modulating compressor 2
After the read-out number 4 the display goes from the label “o 1” to “c47 (see input/output polarity), that
allow to configure the output as digital output to control an external relay.

Pag. 30 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

8. PROGRAMMING WITH THE “HOT KEY 64”


Download: how to program an instrument with a programmed “Hot Key”
1. Turn off the instrument supply
2. Insert the hot key.
3. Turn on the power supply.
4. Immediately the parameters are downloaded.
During the download the regulation is locked and the top display shows the “doL” blinking label. At the end of
the download will appear:
“End” if the programming procedure is completely OK, after 30seconds the regulation starts automatically.
“Err” if the programming procedure has found an error and the parameter have not been transferred. In this
case turn off and then on the instrument supply to repeat the operation or remove the hot key, with power
supply off, to restart the regulation.

Upload: How to program a “Hot Key” with the parameters of the instrument
1. Turn on the power supply.
2. Insert the hot key.
3. Enter the function Menu.
4. Select the UPL function (on the bottom display).
5. Push SET key and immediately the instrument starts transfer the parameters into the Hot key.
During the upload the regulation is locked and the top display shows the “UPL” blinking label. At the end of
the UPLOAD will appear:
“End” if the programming procedure is completely OK, after 30seconds the regulation starts automatically.
“Err” if the programming procedure has found an error and the parameter have not been transferred.
Repeat the procedure.
To exit the UPL function push the MENU key or wait the time-out (15 sec).

9. PROGRAMMING USING THE KEYBOARD


Through the instrument keyboard it is possible to enter the programming. In all the three accessible levels
the user can show and modify both value and visibility of the parameters. To ensure an easy navigation
through the different levels the common parameters have been named and grouped under a family name.
The three levels of programming:
 Pr1 User level
 Pr2 Maintenance level
 Pr3 OEM level

Password default values


 Password level Pr1 = 1
 Password level Pr2 = 2
 Password level Pr3 = 3
Under the function Menu (to reset the Alarm Log or the Compressor Overload) the password is 0 (see
parameter AL46)
Each password can be changed, the range is from 0 to 999.
Each parameter has two level: visibility and modify. Therefore it can be configured as follow:
 The parameter can be showed and changed.
 The parameter can be showed but not changed.

Enter the Pr1 - Pr2 - Pr3 programming levels


Pr1 LEVEL:
Push SET + DOWN together for 3 seconds, the top display shows the PAS label and the bottom display
shows the Pr1 label. The leds cir1/cir2 are blinking (up and down leds) to inform that you now are in PR1
programming level.
Pr2 LEVEL:
From the Pr1 level push the UP key for 2 seconds and the bottom display will show Pr2. The top display still
shows PAS.
Pr3 LEVEL:

Pag. 31 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

From the Pr2 level push the UP key for 2 seconds and the bottom display will show Pr3. The top display still
shows PAS.
After selecting the level push the SET key and the top display will show the 0 blinking value where to insert
the password .
Set the password level using the UP and DOWN keys then confirm with SET key.
Dependening on the password value there will be the different level access, if the password is wrong the
instrument shows the password value again.

ATTENTION:
For all the programming levels Pr1,2,3: the CF family (or configuration parameters) can not be
changed if the unit is running in chiller, heat pump. The user can check the leds #1 and #2 and if they
are blinking it is not possible to change this parameters but it is necessary to set the unit in stand-by
and then enter the programming again.
During the defrost the dF family can’t be programmed.

How to change a parameter value


Enter the programming
1. Push the SET + DOWN keys together for 3 seconds;
2. Select the parameter label with up and down keys;
3. Push SET to enter the parameter value;
4. Change the value with UP or DOWN keys;
5. Push “SET” to confirm, after some seconds the display shows the next parameter;
6. Exit: Push SET + UP together when a parameter label is displayed or wait 15seconds without pushing a
key.
NOTE: a new parameter value is confirmed also after the 15 seconds of timeout is expired (without pushing
SET key to confirm).

Change the Password value


Pr1 LEVEL
Remember that it is necessary to know the old password value.
1) Enter the Pr1 level
2) Select a parameter family.
3) Inside the family select the “Pr1 - 1”, Pr1 on the bottom display, the current password value 1 on the top
display. Push the SET key to change the value that now is blinking.
4) Use the UP or DOWN key to insert the NEW PASSWORD value, then push SET to confirm the new
value.
5) The top display blinks for some seconds and then shows the next parameter.
6) Exit the programming pushing SET + UP together or wait the timeout.

Pr2 LEVEL
Remember that it is necessary to know the old password value.
1. Enter the Pr2 level
2. Select a parameter family.
3. Inside the family select the “Pr2 - 2”, Pr2 on the bottom display, the current password value 2 on the top
display. Push the SET key to change the value that now is blinking.
4. Use the UP or DOWN key to insert the NEW PASSWORD value, then push SET to confirm the new
value.
5. The top display blinks for some seconds and then shows the next parameter
6. Exit the programming pushing SET + UP together or wait the timeout.
Inside the Pr2 level it is possible to change also the Pr1 password.
Pr3 LEVEL
Remember that it is necessary to know the old password value.
1. Enter the Pr3 level
2. Select a parameter family.
3. Inside the family select the “Pr3 - 3”, Pr3 on the bottom display, the current password value “3” on the
top display. Push the SET key to change the value that now is blinking.
4. Use the UP or DOWN key to insert the NEW PASSWORD value, then push SET to confirm the new
value.
5. The top display blinks for some seconds and then shows the next parameter
6. Exit the programming pushing SET + UP together or wait the timeout.
Inside the Pr3 level it is possible to change also the Pr1 and Pr2 passwords.

Pag. 32 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Enter the programming level Pr1


Enter the Pr1 “User level ”:
1. Push the SET + DOWN keys together for 3 seconds. The top display shows PAS while the bottom
display shows Pr1 labels.
2. Push SET key and the top display shows a blinking 0, with UP or DOWN insert the Pr1 password. Push
SET and, if the value is correct, top display will show the first family of parameters “ALL”. Otherwise set
the password again.
3. Select a parameter family with DOWN or UP keys.
4. Push SET to enter, the bottom display shows the first available parameter label while the top display
shows its value.
The user can shows and modify all the parameters belonging to this family.

Parameter status, leds and bottom display in Pr1

 If the selected parameter can not be changed the leds 1 and 2 are blinking.
 In Pr1 level the user can not see and change any parameter of Pr2 and Pr3.
 The MENU key allows to exit from a family to reselect another without exit the Pr1 level.
 To exit completely the programming push SET + UP.

Enter the programming level Pr2


Enter the Pr2 “maintenance level ”:
1. Push the SET + DOWN keys together for 3 seconds. The top display shows PAS while the bottom
display shows Pr1 labels.
2. Push UP key for 2 seconds and the top display will show Pr2.
3. Push SET key and the top display shows a blinking 0, with UP or DOWN insert the Pr2 password. Push
SET and, if the value is correct, top display will show the first family of parameters “ALL”. Otherwise set
the password again.
4. Select a parameter family with DOWN or UP keys.
5. Push SET to enter, the bottom display shows the first available parameter label while the top display
shows its value.
The user can shows and modify all the paramters belonging to this family.
Parameter status, leds and bottom display in Pr2

 Leds 1 / 2 are blinking: the parameter can not be changed.


 All the leds are off: the parameter ca not be seen in Pr1 level.
 Led 3 is on: the parameter can be seen in Pr1 level.
 Leds 1 / 2 are blinking and led 3 is on: the parameter can be showed and changed in Pr2, showed but
not changed in Pr1.
 Leds 1 / 2 / 3 are blinking: the parameter can be showed and changed in Pr2 and in Pr21.
 In Pr2 level the user can not see and change any parameter of Pr3 level.

Pag. 33 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

 The MENU key allows to exit from a family to reselect another without exit the Pr2 level.
 The MENU key allows to pass to Pr1 starting from a family label.
 To exit completely the programming push SET + UP.

Enter the programming level Pr3


Enter the Pr3 “OEM level ”:
1. Push the SET + DOWN keys together for 3 seconds. The top display shows PAS while the bottom
display shows Pr1 labels.
2. Push UP key for 2 seconds and the top display will show Pr2.
1. Push UP key again for 2 seconds and the top display will show Pr3
3. Push SET key and the top display shows a blinking 0, with UP or DOWN insert the Pr3 password. Push
SET and, if the value is correct, top display will show the first family of parameters “ALL”. Otherwise set
the password again.
4. Select a parameter family with DOWN or UP keys.
5. Push SET to enter, the bottom display shows the first available parameter label while the top display
shows its value.
The user can shows and modify all the paramters belonging to this family.

Parameter status, leds and bottom display in Pr3

 Leds 1 / 2 are blinking: the parameter can not be changed.


 All the leds are off: the parameter is available only in Pr3.
 Led 4 on: the parameter can be changed also in Pr2.
 Led 4 blinking: the parameter is visible also in Pr2 .
 Leds 3 / 4 on: the parameter is available in Pr2 and in Pr1.
 Leds 3 / 4 blinking: the parameter is visible in Pr1 and in Pr2.
 The MENU key allows to exit from a family to reselect another without exit the Pr2 level.
 The MENU key allows to pass to Pr1 starting from a family label.
 To exit completely the programming push SET + UP.

Move a parameter level from Pr2 to Pr1


Enter Pr2 programming level
Select the parameter and if the led # 3 is off: the parameter is available only in Pr2.
To show the parameter also in Pr1:
1. Keep pushed SET key;
2. Push 1 time the DOWN key and the led 3 should be on, the parameter is now available in Pr1.
To hide the parameter in Pr1:
1. Keep pushed SET key;
2. Push 1 time the DOWN key and the led 3 should be off, the parameter is now removed from Pr1.

Move a parameter from Pr3 to Pr2 to Pr1


Enter Pr3 programming level, here the parameter are all visible:
Select the parameter, if all the leds are off the parameter is available only in Pr3.
To show the parameter also in Pr2 and Pr1:
1. Keep pushed SET key;
2. Push 1 time the DOWN key and the leds 3 and 4 should be on, the parameter is now available also in
Pr2 / Pr1.
To show the parameter only in Pr2:

Pag. 34 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

1. Keep pushed SET key;


2. Push 1 time the DOWN key and the leds 3 is off, the parameter is now available also in Pr2.
To show the parameter only in Pr3:
1. Keep pushed SET key
2. Push 1 time the DOWN key and the leds 3 and 4 are off, the parameter is now available only in Pr3.

Visibility and Parameter value locked


To set the only visibility and lock the parameter value it is necessary enter Pr3 programming level.
Pr1 PARAMETER VISIBILITY
Enter the Pr3 level
1. Select the parameter;
2. Keep pushed the SET key;
3. Push 1 time the MENU key and the led 3 change from on to blinking: the parameter is visible in Pr1 but
can’t be changed.
Pr2 PARAMETER VISIBILITY
Enter the Pr3 level
1. Select the parameter;
2. Keep pushed the SET key;
3. Push 1 time the MENU key and the led 4 change from on to blinking the parameter is visible in Pr2 but
can’t be changed.
Leds 3 / 4 blinking: the parameter is visible in Pr1 and in Pr2 but in those levels now they can’t be
changed.

TO SET THE ORIGINAL TAG FOR THE PARAMETER Pr1 / Pr2


1. Keep pushed the SET key;
2. Push one time the MENU key, the leds 3 / 4 turn on, the parameter can be seen and modified in Pr1 and Pr2.

Programming: digital input and output polarity


The parameters that allow to configure different options such as:
1. Digital inputs
2. Digital outputs (relay)
3. Proportional output configured as ON/OFF
4. Analogue input configured as digital input
have a different parameter description that allows to configure the operating mode and the corresponding
polarity.

Example of programming:
The bottom display shows the parameter label (CF36) Digital input ID1 configuration;
Note that the top display shows “c” or “o” before the configuration number.

The selection 7 for the digital input ID1 (CF36) means that it is the “high pressure switch of circuit 1”.
The label “o” means that the digital input is active for open contact.

Otherwise if the selection is 7 for the digital input ID1 (CF36) = “high pressure switch of circuit 1”.
The label “c” means that the digital input is active for closed contact.

Change the polarity of the digital Inputs-Outputs


Enter the programming:
1. Select a parameter with digital input/output value, The top display shows the label o before the
configuration number while the bottom display shows the parameter label.

Pag. 35 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

2. Push SET key: the o label and the configuration number are blinking, use the UP or DOWN key and
select the proper polarity ( o / c ) of the function, then push SET key to confirm it all.
3. The top display blinks for some seconds and then it will shows the next parameter.
4. To exit the programming push SET + UP together or wait the timeout (15seconds).

10. CHILLER / HEAT PUMP SELECTION


Select the Chiller or the Heat pump mode
The CF79 parameter allows to select and enable the running mode:
Par. CF79 = 0: Through keyboard
The user can start and stop the unit using the keys of the front panel.

Par. CF79 = 1: Through digital input programmed to start/stop the unit from remote control.
 This selection is enabled if there is one digital input configured as start/stop from remote (remote chiller /
heat pump). I non of the digital input are configure the unit remains in stand–by.
 The “open” status of the input forces the chiller running mode.
 The “closed” status of the input forces the heat pump running mode.
 The keyboard selection is disabled.
 The key on the front panel can start/stop the unit only with the digital input selection

Par. CF79 =2: Automatic selection of the Chiller - Heat Pump through analogue input
The analogue input selection or change over function overrides the digital input C-HP function. If the external
air temperature are within the CF81 differential, the user can change the running mode from the keyboard.
If the unit is running with CF79 = 1 or CF79=2, and it is requested a running mode change, the controller
turns off all the outputs, starts a fixed delay time signalled by the chiller or heat pump blinking led. This
blinking led indicates which running mode will be activated after the compressor delay time protection.

Change Over
To change the running status the following condition must be respected otherwise the unit remains in stand -
by:
1. CF02=3 (heat pump selected)
2. CF79=2 and a NTC probe configured as NTC external air temperature for dynamic setpoint/ boiler /
change over
3. This probe is working properly
Parameters involved with the change over function:
CF80 Change over Setpoint. If the analogue input control (from probe) function is enabled, it represents the
limit temperature of the probe value under which the unit runs the Heat Pump mode.
CF81 Change over Differential. If the analogue input control (from probe) function is enabled, it represents
the limit differential temperature of the probe value to restart in the Chiller mode.
For external air temperature within CF81 the user can manually change the status from keyboard.
GRAPH: AUTOMATIC CHANGE OVER

Keyboard selection
CF78 = 0: pushing key the unit starts in chiller, pushing key the unit starts in heat pump
CF78 = 1: pushing key the unit starts in heat pump, pushing key the unit starts in chiller

Pag. 36 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Analog input selection


CF78 = 0 NTC, External air temperature probe > CF80+ CF81 the unit starts in chiller, NTC, External air
temperature probe < CF80 the unit starts in heat pump.
CF78 = 1 NTC, External air temperature probe > CF80+ CF81 the unit starts in chiller, NTC, External air
temperature probe < CF80 the unit starts in heat pump.

11. HOW TO SWITCH ON / SWITCH OFF THE UNIT

SWITCH ON / SWITCH OFF THE ICHILL BY KEYBOARD

Push and release the key allows to start in chiller mode if CF78 =0, in heat pump if CF78 =1. When
the unit is running the corresponding led is on.
INPORTANT: To change from chiller to heat pump and viceversa the unit must be set in stand-by before
continuing.

Push and release the key allows to start in heat pump mode if CF78 =0, in chiller if CF78 =1er. When
the unit is running the corresponding led is on.
INPORTANT: To change from chiller to heat pump and viceversa the unit must be set in stand-by before
continuing.

STAND- BY ( OR UNIT OFF, NOT RUNNING)

The unit is considered in stand by when the leds and are both off. The stand-by is reached
each time the Chiller or the Heat Pump are turned off. During the stand by the user can:
 Show all the probe measurements
 Detect and reset the alarm events.

SWITCH ON / SWITCH OFF THE ICHILL DIGITAL INPUT


Turn on or off the unit from digital input
Set the digital input as remote ON/OFF, depending on the input polarity it can generate the unit off
 The digital input overrides the keyboard command.
 The keyboard can run only if the digital input is not active.
 When the digital input is not active the instrument restore its status (had before the digital input
activation).

12. SWITCH ON / SWITCH OFF THE CONDENSING UNIT BY DIGITAL


INPUT

DIGITAL INPUT CONFIGURED AS REGULATION REQUEST

Unit configured as condensing unit CF03 = 1.


Digital input thermoregulation request (condensing unit)

 With contact OFF unit on stand-by , the top display shows OFF
 With contact ON unit on stand-by , the top display shows On

With active contact select the chiller mode from the keyboard (the top display shows OnC) or heat pump (the
top display shows OnH), with the funcioning mode active the step is activated, the others, if availables, will
be requested by configured digital input as resources on circuits.

Pag. 37 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

With active contact if the unit is being switched off by keyboard it can be switched on by keyboard. If the unit
is being switched off by keyboard, in order to switch on the unit from digital input it must be deactivated and
activated.

DIGITAL INPUT CONFIGURED AS CHILLER REQUEST

Unit configured as condensing unit CF03 = 1


Digital input chiller request (condensing unit)

 With contact OFF unit on stand-by , the top display shows OFF
 With contact ON unit on stand-by , the top display shows OnC

With active contact unit on chiller mode is activated also a step, the others, if availables, will be requested by
configured digital input as as resources on circuits.
With active contact if the unit is being switched off by keyboard it can be switched on by keyboard. If the unit
is being switched off by keyboard, in order to switch on the unit from digital input it must be deactivated and
activated.

DIGITAL INPUT CONFIGURATED AS HEAT PUMP REQUEST

Unit configured as condensing unit CF03 = 1


Digital input heat pump request (condensing unit)

 With contact OFF unit on stand-by , the top display shows OFF
 With contact ON unit on stand-by , the top display shows OnH

With active contact unit on chiller mode is activated also a step, the others, if availables, will be requested by
configured digital input as as resources on circuits.
With active contact if the unit is being switched off by keyboard it can be switched on by keyboard. If the unit
is being switched off by keyboard, in order to switch on the unit from digital input it must be deactivated and
activated.

13. DISPLAY LAYOUT


As default, in normal condition, the display shows the circuit 1 information.
The displayed circuit is indicated from the corresponding led Cir1 on (UP key), or Cir2 (circuit 2, DOWN
key).

How to show the measurement list


With the led Cir1 on, push UP or Down keys to display the labels of the information of the circuit 1.
With the led Cir2 on, push UP or Down keys to display the labels of the information of the circuit 2.
Each measurement is defined by a label that indicates which if it is a pressure a temperature or a time.

How to read the circuit 1 or 2 probe temperature or pressure


To swap between the probe value of the two circuits push SET button; the led “cir1” or “cir2” is lighted to
indicate the probe of the circuit 1 or circuit 2.

Example in fig.1
Led cir1 is on: the top display shows the value of the output evaporator temperature ( 7.8°C) of the circuit 1,
The bottom display shows Out 1. Push SET key to swap to the circuit 2. Fig2
Led cir2 is on: the top display shows the value of the output evaporator temperature ( 7.9°C) of the circuit 2,
the bottom display shows Out 2.
Fig.1

Pag. 38 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Fig.2

14. DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

The dP family of parameters allows to set a custom display read-out. The user can change the default read-
out (both for instrument and remote terminals) of the measurements depending on the application.

Top Display

Bottom display

Default read - out of the top display


To set the default value displayed on the top display:
1. Set the parameter dP03 = 0, it means configurable;
2. Select the dP01 parameter into the range 0..14 descripted here below:

PARAMETER CORRESPONDING
DESCRIPTION
VALUE LABEL
dP01=0 No label No label
dP01=1 temperature probe of the evaporator water inlet Ein
Out1 circuit 1
dP01=2 temperature probe of the evaporator water outlet 1 and 2
Out2 circuit 2
dP01=3 temperature probe of the uscita common evaporator water outlet Eout
CIn1 circuit 1
dP01=4 temperature probe of the condenser water inlet
CIn2 circuit 2
dP01=5 temperature probe of the common condenser water inlet Cin

Pag. 39 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Cou1 circuit 1
dP01=6 temperature probe of the condenser water outlet
Cou2 circuit 2
dP01=7 temperature probe of the common condenser water outlet Cout

dP01=8 temperature probe of the dynamic external air setpoint Et

dP01=9 temperature probe of the free cooling water inlet FCIn

dP01=10 temperature probe of the free cooling external air value FCEt

dP01=11 temperature probe of the remote terminal 1 trt1

dP01=12 temperature probe of the remote terminal 2 trt2


dEF1 circuit 1
dP01=13 temperature probe of the combined defrost
dEF2 circuit 2
dP01=14 sanitary water temperature 1 San1
dP01=15
sanitary water temperature 2 San2
dP01=16 SoLE
solar panel water temperature
Cdt1 circuit 1
dP01=17 temperature probe of the condenser
Cdt2 circuit 2

Default read - out of the bottom display


To set the default value displayed on the bottom display:
1. Set the parameter dP03 = 0, it means configurable;
2. Select the dP02 parameter into the range 0..17 descripted here below:

PARAMETER CORRESPONDING
DESCRIPTION
VALUE LABEL
dP02=0 No label No label
dP02=1 temperature probe of the evaporator water inlet Ein
Out1 circuit 1
dP02=2 temperature probe of the evaporator water outlet 1 and 2
Out2 circuit 2
dP02=3 temperature probe of the common evaporator water outlet Eout
CIn1 circuit 1
dP02=4 temperature probe of the condenser water inlet
CIn2 circuit 2
dP02=5 temperature probe of the common condenser water inlet Cin
Cou1 circuit 1
dP02=6 temperature probe of the condenser water outlet
Cou2 circuit 2
dP01=7 temperature probe of the common condenser water outlet Cout

dP02=8 temperature probe of the dynamic external air setpoint Et

dP02=9 temperature probe of the free cooling water inlet FCIn

dP02=10 temperature probe of the free cooling external air value FCEt

dP02=11 temperature probe of the remote terminal 1 trt1

dP02=12 temperature probe of the remote terminal 2 trt2


dEF1 circuit 1
dP02=13 temperature probe of the combined defrost
dEF2 circuit 2
dP02=14 sanitary water temperature 1 San1

Pag. 40 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

dP02=15 sanitary water temperature 2 San2

dP02=16 solar panel water temperature SoLE


Cdt1 circuit 1
dP02=17 temperature probe of the condenser
Cdt2 circuit 2
Cdt1 circuit 1
dP02=18 pressure probe of the condenser 4÷20mA - 0.5V
Cdt2 circuit 2
LP1 circuit 1
dP02=19 pressure probe of the evaporator 4÷20mA - 0.5V
LP2 circuit 2
OIL1 comp 1
dP02=20 pressure probe of the compressor oil differential
OIL2 comp 2
dP02=21 Clock

Forced read - out of the top and bottom display


To force the display read-out:
1. Set the dP03 parameter not equal to 0
2. Select the value range 1..3
These configurations allow to show together two temperatures or two pressures of the same circuit in order
to have an easier reading of the measurements:
Par. dP03 = 1
Top display: for both the circuits 1,2:
 Evaporator water inlet, with the Ein label.
Bottom display: circuit 1:
 Evaporator 1 water outlet, with the label OuT1
Bottom display: circuit 2:
 Evaporator 2 water outlet, with the label OuT2.
Par. dP03 = 2
Top display of the circuit 1:
 Condenser 1 water inlet temperature with the label CIn1
Bottom display of the circuit 1
 Condenser 1water outlet with the label COu1.
Top display of the circuit 2:
Condenser 2 water inlet temperature with the label Cin2
Bottom display of the circuit 2
 Condenser 2water outlet with the label Cou2.
Par. dP03 = 3
Top display of the circuit 1:
 Condenser probe temperature Cdt1 / pressure CdP1
Bottom display of the circuit 1
 Evaporator pressure probe LP1
Top display of the circuit 2:
Condenser probe temperature Cdt2 / pressure CdP2
Bottom display of the circuit 2
Evaporator pressure probe LP2

Default display read - out of the remote panels VI620S


If the parameter dP04 = 0 the upper display of the remote panels #1 and #2 depends on the parameter
values dP01 – dP02 – dP03; to show the temperature detected by the internal probe of the remote panel
accessing the function menu under the function trEm.
If the parameter dP04 = 1 the upper display of the remote panels #1 and #2 show their internal NTC sensor
(ambient temperature); to show the same temperature it is possible to eccess the function menu under the
function trEm.

15. DISPLAY INFORMATION


Show the Set Point value

Pag. 41 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Push and release the SET key, the leds of the circuits are off and the set value is displayed.
In stand-by the bottom display shows SetC (set chiller), by pushing SET again the next label is SetH (set
heat pump ).
If the unit is running the only set displayed is related to the running mode.

Modify the Set Point


1) Push SET key for at least 3 seconds: the leds of the circuits are off and the set value is blinking.
2) Use the UP or DOWN key to modify the setpoint.
3) Push SET to confirm or wait the timeout (15seconds).

Show the active SetPoint during Energy Saving or Dynamic Setpoint


If the unit is running in chiller or HP, the Energy Saving or the Dinamic Setpoint activity is signalled by the
blinking led of the SET button.

Chiller mode: push SET one time, the bottom display shows the SEtC (set chiller) while the top display
shows the set value. Only if the Energy saving or the Dynamic Setpoint are active, pushing another time the
SET key, the bottom display shows “SEtr” (real setpoint), and the top display shows the setpoint that the
unit is really using for the thermoregulation.
Chiller mode: push SET one time, the bottom display shows the SEtH (set Heat pump) while the top display
shows the set value. Only if the Energy saving or the Dynamic Setpoint are active, pushing another time the
SET key, the bottom display shows “SEtr” (real setpoint), and the top diplay shows the setpoint that the unit
is really using for the thermoregulation.
ATTENTION
The SEtr label appears only if the Energy saving or the Dynamic Setpoint are active.
To modify the working setpoint it is necessary the setpoint values is displayed on both the display
(temperature / temperature or temperature / pressure o pressure/ pressure) without any identification label,
otherwise the SET key swaps to the circuit information.

Display in Remote Off


From digital input configured as remote ON/OFF: the active input sets the unit in OFF (even when the unit is
a ).
The top display shows “OFF ”, the led of the decimal point is blinking.

Display in Condensing unit configuration


The top display shows “ON” for active input and “OFF” for not active input. If the unit is running in Chiller the
top display shows OnC otherwise OnH for heat pump.
The configuration for condensing unit, as for chiller or HP, allows to show through the top and the bottom
display all the detected input measurements and alarms.

16. FUNCTION MENU “ M” KEY


The function Menu is composed of the following items:
1) Show and reset the alarms ALrM
2) Compressor overload alarm reset COtr
3) Show and reset the alarm log ALOG
4) Upload the parameter into the Hot Key UPL
5) Enable – disable one or the two circuits CrEn
6) Enable – disable one of the compressors COEn
7) Display the compressor discharge temperature COdt
8) Show and reset the number of compressor running hour Hour
9) Show and reset the number of compressor starts-up COSn
10) Show the condensing fan speed percentage of the proportional output Cond

Pag. 42 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

11) Show the percentage of the proportional output 0 ÷ 10 Vdc Pout


12) Time counting to next defrost cycle, under heat pump mode, dF
13) Show the probe temperatures that enabled to control the auxiliary output uS
14) Read temperature of solar panel SoL
15) Read temperature of the Free cooling SoL
16) Show the probe the temperature of the remote panels trEM

With the UP or DOWN keys move inside the label list.

Alarm list: show and reset


ALrM FUNCTION
Enter the function MENU pushing M key one time
1) Use the UP or DOWN to select the AlrM label
2) Push SET key (Nothing happens if there are no active alarm events)
3) Bottom display: alarm label code. Top display: label rSt to reset or NO if it is not possible.
4) Use the UP or DOWN to scroll the alarm list.
5) Pushing SET when the rSt label is displayed the corresponding alarm will be reset, then the display
shows next alarm in the list, pushing SET again the alarm is reset and the display shows next alarm etc.
Nothing happens by pushing SET when the label NO is displayed, in this case push UP or DOWN to
move to another alarm label.
6) To exit the ALrM reset function push MENU one time or wait the timeout.

Compressor overload alarm reset


16.1.1 Compressor overload alarm; manual reset
If the number of compressor overload alarm is lower than the parameter AL20, the alarm is showed in the
Alrm function.
Labels involved:
CO1r = compressor 1 overload reset

CO6r = compressor 6 overload reset.

MANUAL ALARM RESET PROCEDURE


Enter Menu function
1. Use UP or DOWN key and select the Alrm on the bottom display.
2. Push SET one time, if there are active alarms the bottom display shows the alarm label eg. C1tr (for
compressor 1) while the top display shows the label rSt to reset the alarm or NO if the alarm can not be
reset. Use the UP or DOWN keys to scroll all the alrm list (nothing happens by pushing SET when the
label NO is displayed).
3. Pushing SET when the rSt label is displayed; the corresponding alarm will be reset
4. To exit the Alrm function push MENU or wait the timeout.
5. Repeat operation 1 – 4 to reset the other alarms.

16.1.2 Compressor overload alarm; manual reset with password


If the number of compressor overload alarm is bigger than the parameter AL20, the alarm is showed in the
COtr function.

Labels involved in Cotr function:


CO1r = compressor 1 overload reset

CO6r = compressor 6 overload reset

MANUAL ALARM RESET PROCEDURE


Enter Menu function
1. Use UP or DOWN key and select the COtr on the bottom display.
2. Push SET one time, if there are active alarms the bottom display shows the alarm label eg. CO1r (for
compressor 1) while the top display shows the label rSt to reset the alarm or NO if the alarm can not be
reset. Use the UP or DOWN keys to scroll all the alrm list.
3. Nothing happens by pushing SET when the label NO is displayed.
4. Pushing SET when the rSt label is displayed the corresponding alarm will be reset after the password:
bottom display = ArSt while the top display = PAS.

Pag. 43 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

5. Push SET and the top display blinks 0 while the bottom shows PAS. Insert the password using UP or
DOWN key (see AL parameter family). If the password is OK the ArSt blinks for per 3seconds, if the
password value is not correct the top display blinks 0 while the bottom shows PAS. If within 5 seconds
no value is inserted the display label come back to CO1r function.
6. To exit the COtr function push MENU or wait the timeout.
7. Repeat operation 1 – 5 to reset the other alarms.

Compressor overload password


The default value is 0 to change this value enter Pr3 level under the AL parameter family

Alarm log list


ALOG FUNCTION TO SEE THE ALARM LOG
The function and the alarm codes are visible only if there are alarm events. If many events are active at the
same time the list displayed by increasing order.
Enter the function Menu
1. Select ALOG
2. Push SET one time. Nothing happens if there are no active alarm events.
3. The bottom display shows the alarm label, the top display shows the a number in the range 00 to 99.
4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to scroll the list.
5. To exit the ALOG function push MENU or wait the timeout.
Erase the Alarm log list
ALOG FUNCTION TO ERASE THE LOG LIST

1. Enter the function Menu.


2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select ALOG on the bottom display.
3. Push on e time the SET key.
4. Within the ALOG function select with UP or DOWN keys, the ArSt label on the bottom display while the
top display shows PAS.
5. Push SET: the bottom display shows PAS and the top display a blinking 0.
6. Insert the password (See parameter family AL)
7. If the password is OK the label ArST blinks for 5 seconds then the display returns to normal condition
read-out (probes).
8. If the password is not correct the display shows PAS again. in any case is possible to scroll the list with
UP or DOWN
9. To exit push the M key one time or wait the timeout.

Password value of the alarm list


The default value is 0 to change this value enter Pr3 level under the AL parameter family.

THE ALARM LIST CONTAINS 100 EVENTS IN A FIFO STRUCTURE. WHEN THE MEMORY IS FULL
ANY NEW ALARM WILL ERASE THE OLDEST.

Disable – enable a single circuit


Through the instruments keyboard is possible to completely disable a single circuit for maintenance or to use
just a cooling part of of the unit.

CrEn FUNCTION enables – disables a circuit from keyboard.


Label involved with CrEn function: Cr1E = circuit 1, Cr2E = circuit 2
DISABLE A CIRCUIT
Enter the function Menu
1. Use UP or DOWN keys to select CrEn on the bottom display
2. Push SET key: the bottom display = Cr1E, top display = En.
3. Select the circuit 1 or 2 with UP or DOWN (Cr1E or Cr2E).
4. Push SET key for 3 seconds when one of the two Cr1E, Cr2E label are displayed. The top display shows
the En blinking label, use the UP or DOWN to change in diS (Disabled) or En (Enabled). then push SET
key to confirm the new selection. The display shows next circuit status.
5. To exit the CrEn function push MENU key or wait the timeout.

Read-out of a Circuit Not enabled

Pag. 44 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

If one circuit is disabled the bottom display shows diS alternated with the label name of the measurement
selected.
Circuit 1 = diS the bottom display shows b1dS = circuit 1 disabled.
Circuit 2 = diS the bottom display shows b2dS = circuit 2 disabled.
nd
The b2dS label appears only if the 2 circuit is configured,

Enable or disable a single compressor


Through the instruments keyboard is possible to disable a single compressor for maintenance or to lock it
when malfunctioning .
COEn FUNCTION compressors running status.
Label involved in COEn function: CO1E = Compressor 1 status… CO6E = Compressor 6 status
The COEn function uses only the compressors configured by the corresponding output parameters.
Enter the function Menu
1. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select COEn.
2. Push SET key: bottom display = CO1E, top display = En
3. Select the compressor with UP or DOWN: CO2E - CO3E - CO4E - CO5E - CO6E if available.
4. Push SET for 3 seconds when the label corresponds to the compressor to disable: CO1E - CO2E -
CO3E - CO4E - CO5E - CO6E. The top display shows the blinking En label, use the UP or DOWN key
and change to diS (Compressor disabled) or En (compressor enabled) then push SET to confirm, the
display shows next item.
5. To exit the COEn function push MENU key or wait the timeout.

Read-out of a compressor Not enabled


During the normal running condition a disabled compressor is displayed with a blinking label alternated with
the measurement value of the display.
If the compressor is disabled these the corresponding labels: C1dS = compressor 1 disabled…C6dS =
compressor 6 disabled
The label C1dS…C6dS are available only if the corresponding compressor is configured.

Read-out of the compressor discharge temperature probe


The menu function allows to read-out the compressor temperature probes.
COdt FUNCTION shows the discharge temperatures
Label involved in Codt function: CO1t Compressor 1 discharge temperature… CO6t Compressor 6
discharge temperature
1. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select COdt
2. Push SET key: bottom display = CO1t, top display = temperature value of that probe.
3. Use the UP or DOWN kys to scroll the list: CO1t or CO2t or CO3t or CO4t or CO5t or CO6t
4. To exit the COEn function push MENU key or wait the timeout
ATTENZIONE
The labels Codt are available only if the corresponding compressor probe is configured.
The display resolution is 0.1°C until the read-out is 99.9, over 100°C it is 1°C.

Read-out of the running hours


This menu allows to shows all the time running hours of the compressors, supply fan and pumps.
Hour FUNCTION to show the controlled load consumption
Label involved in the Hour function:
CO1H Compressor 1 running hours .. CO6H Compressor 6 running hours.
EP1H Evaporator water pump or Supply fan running hours (air/air)
EP2H Support evaporator water pump running hours
CP1H Condenser water pump running hours
CP2H Support condenser water pump running hours
The labels are displayed only if the corresponding output is present and configured.
The running hours is displayed on the top display, the resolution is x 10 hours (eg 2 means 20 hours, 20
means 200hours)
Enter the function Menu
1. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select Hour
2. Push SET key: bottom display = above labels, top display = hours x10. The time is on.
3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to scroll the list.
4. To exit the Hour function push MENU key or wait the timeout

Reset the running hour

Pag. 45 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Enter the function Menu


1. Within the Hour function select, with UP or DOWN, the interested label: CO1H, CO2H, CO3H, CO4H,
CO6H, EP1H, EP2H, CP1H, CP2H.
2. Push the SET keys for 3seconds: the top display shows the running hours blinking value, then it shows 0
to confirm the reset. The next load label is automatically loaded.
To exit the Hour function push MENU key or wait the timeout

Read-out of the compressor starts-up


For each compressor is possible to show the number of starts-up.
COSn FUNCTION: number of starts-up of the compressor
Label involved in COSn function: C1S number of compressor 1 starts-up .. C6S number of compressor 6
starts-up
The labels are displayed only if the corresponding output is present and configured
The number of starts-up is displayed on the top display, the resolution is x 10 (eg 2 means 20 starts, 20
means 200starts)
Enter the function Menu
1. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select COSn.
2. Push SET one time: the label of the first load C1S is showed on the top display, the bottom display
shows the number x10.
3. With UP or DOWN scroll the compressor list.
4. To exit the Hour function push MENU key or wait the timeout

Reset the starts-up number


Enter the function Menu
1. Within the Hour function select, with UP or DOWN, the interested label: CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4, CS6.
2. Push the SET keys for 3seconds: the top display shows the running hours blinking value, then it shows 0
to confirm the reset. The next load label is automatically loaded.
3. To exit the Hour function push MENU key or wait the timeout.

Read-out of the Proportional Output percentage of the condenser fan control


The proportional outputs of the two circuits, that control the fan speed, can be showed in the menu function.
Cond FUNCTION selects the proportional output 1 and 2.
Label involved in Cond function.
Cnd1 Proportional output status of the condenser fan of the circuit 1.
Cnd2 Proportional output status of the condenser fan of the circuit 2.

TO SEE THE OUTPUT PERCENTAGE:


Enter the function menu
1. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select Cond.
2. Push SET key: the bottom display shows Cnd1, the top display shows the output percentage.
3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select Cnd1 or Cnd2, the top display always shows the value, between
0% and 100%, of the proportional output of the selected circuit.
4. To exit the Hour function push MENU key or wait the timeout.

Read-out of the four proportional output


The four proportional outputs, 4..20ma or 0-10V, can be showed in the menu function.
Pout FUNCTION selects the proportional outputs.
Label involved in Cond function:
Pou1 Proportional output for dumper control or to drive the external relay 1
Pou2 Proportional output for dumper control or to drive the external relay 2
Pou3 Proportional output for dumper control or to drive the external relay 3
Pou4 Proportional output for dumper control or to drive the external relay 4
The labels are displayed only if the corresponding output is present and configured.
TO SEE THE FOUR OUTPUT PERCENTAGE:
Enter the function menu
1. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select Pout.
2. Push SET key: the bottom display shows Pou1, the top display shows the output percentage.
3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select Pou1, Pou2, Pou3 or Pou4 the top display always shows the value,
between 0% and 100%, of the proportional output of the selected circuit.
4. To exit the Hour function push MENU key or wait the timeout.

ATTENTION:

Pag. 46 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

If the proportional output Pou1 - Pou2 - Pou3 - Pou4 are configured to drive an external relay the display will show 0=relay off
and 100=relay on.

Read-out of the time counting to the next defrost


The 2 times delay to next defrosts of the two circuits can be showed in the menu function.
dF FUNCTION time to next defrost.
Label involved in dF function:
dF1 delay time to next defrost of the circuit 1
dF2 delay time to next defrost of the circuit 2
The labels apperas on if the heat pump configuration is enabled.

Enter the function menu :


1. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select dF
2. Push SET key: the dF1 label is showed on the top display, the bottom display shows the time delay to
next defrost in minutes / seconds. The icon is on.
3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select dF1 or dF2.
4. To exit the Hour function push MENU key or wait the timeout

Read-out of the probes configured to control Solar panel


Sol FUNCTION
Label involved in Sol function:
FCP1 Free cooling probe 1 temperature
FCP2 Free cooling probe 2 temperature
FCdF Free cooling differential
FCrL Free cooling water pump status
FCAn Free cooling analog output status

Read-out of the probes configured to control Free cooling


Sol FUNCTION
Label involved in Sol function:
SLPb Solar panel probe 1 temperature
SSP2 Solar panel probe 2 temperature
SSdi Solar panel differential
SPMP Solar panel water pump status
SLrL Solar panel valve status

Read-out of the probes configured to control an auxiliary output relay


The probe values, configured to control the auxiliary relay output, can be showed in the menu function.
uS FUNCTION temperature/pressure value of the control probe for auxiliary output.
Label involved in uS function:
uSt1 auxiliary probe value of the circuit 1
uSt2 auxiliary probe value of the circuit 2
Enter the function menu
1. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select uS.
2. Push SET key: the label uSt1 (temperature probe ) or uSP1 (Pressure probe) is showed on bottom
display, the top display shows the the temperature or pressure value.
3. Use the UP or DOWN keys to select uSt1 auxiliary probe for circuit 1or uSt2 auxiliary probe for circuit 2.
4. To exit the Hour function push MENU key or wait the timeout.

How to display the tempaerature of the internal temperaure sensor of the remote terminals 1
or 2
Inside the funcion menu it is possible to see the ambient temperature detected by the NTC sensor
FUNCTION trEM to show the temperature of the remote panels
Identification label trEM.
trE1 value of the NTC probe of the remote #1
trE2 value of the NTC probe of the remote #2
Select with UP or DOWN the trEM function
Push SET the trE1 or trE2 label is shown on the bottom display, the top display shows the probe value.
Use the UP or DOWN arrow to change beteween trE1 or trE2 read-out.

Pag. 47 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

To exit to the normal display read-out push MENU or wait the time – out time.
ATTENTION:
THE trEm function and the labels trE1 or trE2 appear only if the CF74 = =2 or 3 (remote panel 1
configuration) or if the parameter CF75 = 2 or 3 (remote panel 2 configuration).

17. ENERGY SAVING

17.1 Energy Saving Activation By Digital Input


The energy saving is activated when one digital input is configured as energy saving is active.
If the energy saving is active, the icon is on.
The real value of the set point is showed pressing the key.
When the Energy Saving function is activated the chiller set point and heat pump are modified as follow:
 Set point chiller = St1  ES14
 Chiller differential = ES15
 Set point heat pump = St4  ES16
 Heat pump differential = ES17

17.2 Energy Saving Time Table With Rtc


This function can be used only if the Ichill has the real time clock on board (optional) and allows to set three
events per day.
If the energy saving is active, the icon is on.
The real value of the set point is showed pressing the key.
When the Energy Saving function is activated the chiller set point and heat pump are modified as follow:
 Set point chiller = St1  ES14
 Chiller differential = ES15
 Set point heat pump = St4  ES16
 Heat pump differential = ES17

How to program the Energy saving and how to Switch on / Switch off the Ichill by RTC
Enter the parameter programming:
1. Select the ES parameter family.
2. Select the parameters ES07 (Monday)…ES13 (Sunday).
Configuration table Energy saving or unit ON/OFF activation with rtc programming

Par. ES07 – ES13 0= Function disabled


1= 1st period enabled
2= 2nd period enabled
3= 1st and 2nd periods enabled
rd
4= 3 period enabled
st rd
5= 1 and 3 periods enabled
6= 2 and 3rd periods enabled
nd
st nd rd
7= 1 , 2 and 3 periods enabled
Energy saving or unit where: X with range 0..7 represents the energy saving
ON/OFF with RTC and X Y where: Y with range 0..7 represents the unit on/off

Example of a daily programming:


Monday
Enter parameter programming:
1. In the ES parameter family, select the parameter ES07, the top display shows 0 - 0
2. Push SET key and using UP or DOWN keys set the right value:
3. Push SET to confirm.

MONDAY
X = 0 - Y= 0: energy saving and automatic on/off are both disabled

Pag. 48 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

MONDAY
X = 0 - Y= 1: the energy saving is disabled, the automatic on is enabled in time band 1

MONDAY
X = 3 - Y= 7: the energy saving is enabled in time band 1 and time band 2, the automatic on is enabled in
time band 1, time band 2 and time band 3.

WEEKLY PROGRAMMING

Repeat the daily programming for the other days of the week using parameters ES08..ES13.

How to switch on the controller when it is off by real time clock

When the unit is in OFF by RTC and the parameter ES18 > 0, if the user switch on the controller by
keyboard the unit stay on for ES18 time; when this time is elapsed the unit return to OFF.

18. DYNAMIC SETPOINT


This function allows to modify the set point according to outside temperature or a 4..20mA analog input.
This function is enabled if:

Pag. 49 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

 In chiller mode the parameter Sd01 is not equal to 0.


 In heat pump mode the parameter Sd02 is not equal to 0.
 A analog input is configured as 4÷20mA for dynamic setpoint control or outside temperature

Dynamic setpoint diagram


Analog input configured as 4..20mA for dynamic setpoint:

Analog input configured as outside temperature and positive differential:

Analog input configured as outside temperature and negative differential:

Pag. 50 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

19. COMPRESSOR REGULATION


CF94 Working mode of the compressor
0 = chiller and heat pump
0 2
1 = only chiller
2 = only heat pump

It is possible to decide how many compressors are used in chiller, heat pump and sanitary water production.
o parameter CO76: number of compressors to use in chiller
o parameter CO77: number of compressors to use in heat pump
o parameter CO78: number of compressors to use in sanitary water

In case of contemporary production of sanitary water and chiller the number of compressors is defined
by sanitary water request.

19.1 Compressor Security Time


o CO01 Minimum ON time of the compressor after switching on
o CO02 Minimum OFF time of the compressor after switching off
o CO91 Minimum time between two switch on of the same compressor

20. CHILLER / HEAT PUMP REGULATION

20.1 Parameter Description


Par. ST01 Chiller Setpoint
It allows to set the chiller working temperature within the range ST02..ST03.
Par. ST02 Minimum setpoint limit in chiller.
The user cannot program a setpoint value lower than ST02, the range is –30 °C..ST01.
Par. ST03 Maximum setpoint limit in chiller.
The user cannot program a setpoint value higher than ST02, the range is ST01..70°C.
Par. ST04 Heat pump setpoint
It allows to set the Heat pump working temperature within the range ST05..ST06.
Par. ST05 Minimum setpoint limit in heat pump.
The user cannot program a setpoint value lower than ST05, the range is –30 °C..ST04.
Par. ST06 Maximum setpoint limit in heat pump
The user cannot program a setpoint value higher than ST06, the range is ST01..70°C.
Par. ST07 Regulation band width in chiller mode.
Par. ST08 Regulation band in heat pump mode
Par. ST09 Defines the thermoregulation probe in chiller.
0= NTC Temperature probe of the evaporator inlet
1= NTC Temperature probe of the evaporator circuit 1
2= NTC Temperature probe of the evaporator circuit 2
3= NTC Temperature probe of the common evaporator
4= Remote keyboard 1 probe
5= Remote keyboard 2 probe
The ST10 parameter defines the thermoregulation probe of the unit with heat pump control
0= NTC probe temperature of the evaporator inlet
1= NTC probe temperature of the evaporator 1 outlet
2= NTC probe temperature of the evaporator 2 outlet
3= NTC probe temperature of the evaporator common outlet

Pag. 51 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

4= Remote keyboard 1 probe


5= Remote keyboard 2 probe
6= NTC probe temperature of the condenser common inlet
7= NTC probe temperature of the condenser 1 inlet
8= NTC probe temperature of the condenser 2 inlet
9= NTC probe temperature of the condenser 1 outlet
10= NTC probe temperature of the condenser 2 outlet
11= NTC probe temperature of the condenser common outlet

The parameter ST11 determines the type of regulation


St11 = 0 Proportional regulation
St11 = 1 Neutral zone regulation

20.2 Proportional Regulation

Chiller regulation

Heat pump regulation

Pag. 52 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

20.3 Neutral Zone Regulation


Compressor regulation in chiller

Compressor regulation in heat pump

Pag. 53 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Compressor in neutral zone


Par. CO53 Maximum time of work in neutral zone without insert resource
When the temperature is inside the neutral zone, a timer is activated (parameter CO53); when this time is
elapsed, the Ichill switch on all the compressor to avoid an stationary situation.
If the parameter value is 0 the function is non activated.

Par. CO54 Maximum time of work in neutral zone without rotation resource
When the temperature is inside the neutral zone and only one compressor is ON, a timer is activated
(parameter CO54); when this time is elapsed, the Ichill switch off the compressor and swith on an available
compresso.
If the parameter value is 0 the function is non activated.

21. COMPRESSORS MANAGEMENT

21.1 Compressors Start- Up


The parameter CO10 defines the compressor start-up:
CO10=0 direct
CO10=1 part winding
CO10=2 star-delta

Direct Start- Up
It is necessary to configure one relay to drive the contactor of the compressor.
EXAMPLE
Direct start up configuration for one compressor
Set the parameter CF54 = c39  direct start-up RL1 compressor 1

Pag. 54 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Fig. 1

Part Winding
Each compressor needs two relay outputs:
 Part Winding coil 1 of the compressor;
 Part Winding coil 2 of the compressor.
The time delay between coil 1 and coil 2 activation is CO11 (decimal of second, in a range 0..5 seconds).
The maximum number of relay outputs is 8, this means 4 compressors managed with Part Winding start-up.
EXAMPLE
Part Winding configuration of the compressor relay outputs
Set the Par CF54 = c39 Part Winding coil 1 the compressor 1;
Set the Par CF55 = c40 Part Winding coil 2 of the compressor 1.

Compressor Start- up With Part Winding

First step: the Part winding coil 1 of the compressor 1 (relay K1 of fig2) is switched on
Second step: after the CO11 delay is turned on the Part winding coil 2 of the compressor 1 (relay K2 of fig2).
To turn off the compressor the two relay outputs are both turned off at the same time.

Fig 2

Part Winding start- up of Compressors or capacity compressors


If one or more capacity compressors are configured and the thermoregulation requires the full load start-up:
st
the controller turns the solenoid valve on, after 1 second the first motor part of the 1 compressor (relay K1
of Fig. 2) and then the complete control with the contactor K2. Durning the CO13 time delay the step valve is
forced on: minimum power. When the C013 is expired if the thermoregulation requires more power the valve
will be switched off (maximum power).

Star - Delta Start up


The Ichill manages maximum 2 compressor with star-delta start-up; each compressor needs three relay
outputs:
 Line 1 of the compressor 1 (Relay K1 of the Fig.3).
 Line 2 of the compressor 1 (Relay K3 of the Fig.3).
 Centre of the star (Relay K2 of the Fig.3)
Compressor switching on:
the centre of the star relay is turned on (Relay K2 of the Fig.3), after 1 second the Line #1 relay is turned on
(relay K1 Fig.3). The two relays work together for the time set in CO11, then the relay of centre of the star is

Pag. 55 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

switched off (relay K2 Fig.2). Then after the CO12 delay time the relay of the line #2 is turned on (relay K3
Fig.3).
Compressor switching off:
the output relay of the line #1 and line #2 are switched off together.

Fig. 3

Star - Delta Start- Up Of A Capacity Compressor


If one or more capacity compressors are configured and the thermoregulation requires the full load control,
the controller turns the solenoid valve on, then after 1 second the centre of the star relay is turned on (relay
K2 Fig. 3). Then the star-delta procedure will be completed with the other two contactors. Durning the CO13
time delay the step valve is forced on: minimum power. When the C013 is expired if the thermoregulation
requires more power the valve will be switched off (maximum power).

22. COMPRESSORS ROTATION


The CO14 parameter determines the sequence of compressor activation / deactivation.
CO14= 0 Fixed sequence.
E.g.: 3 compressors configured
Switching on: 1st compressor  2nd compressor  3rd compressor  etc.
rd nd st
Switching off: 3 compressor  2 compressor - 1 compressor
CO14= 1
Working hour rotation
First compressor to be activated is the compressor with less working hours; next compressor to be activated
follows the same rule.
CO14= 2
Sart-up rotation
First compressor to be activated is the compressor with less start-up; next compressor to be activated
follows the same rule.

23. CAPACITY STEP CONTROL


CO06 capacity step operation mode.
To select the right operation mode, please read the compressor technical documentation.

 CO06 = 0 ON/OFF step

Eg: compressor with 3 capacity step.

Capacity 25% 50% 75% 100%


Compr. Compressor ON Compressor ON Compressor ON Compressor ON
Out relay Cap. step 1 ON Cap. step 1 OFF Cap. step 1 OFF Cap. step 1 OFF

Pag. 56 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Out relay Cap. step 2 OFF Cap. step 2 ON Cap. step 2 OFF Cap. step 2 OFF
Out relay Cap. step 3 OFF Cap. step 3 OFF Cap. step 3 ON Cap. step 3 OFF

Step control process

Compressor Cap. Cap. Cap. Power


step 1 step 2 step 3
0%
25 %
50 %
75 %
100 %

 CO06 = 1 direct action

Eg: compressor with 3 capacity step.

Capacity 25% 50% 75% 100%


Compr. Compressor ON Compressor ON Compressor ON Compressor ON
Out relay Cap. step 1 ON Cap. step 1 ON Cap. step 1 ON Cap. step 1 OFF
Out relay Cap. step 2 OFF Cap. step 2 ON Cap. step 2 ON Cap. step 2 OFF
Out relay Cap. step 3 OFF Cap. step 3 OFF Cap. step 3 ON Cap. step 3 OFF

Direct action with sequential step

Compressor Cap. Cap. Cap. Power


step 1 step 2 step 3
0%
25 %
50 %
75 %
100 %

 CO06 = 2 inverse action

Eg: compressor with 3 capacity step.

Capacity 25% 50% 75% 100%


Compr. Compressor ON Compressor ON Compressor ON Compressor ON
Out relay Cap. step 1 ON Cap. step 1 ON Cap. step 1 ON Cap. step 1 OFF
Out relay Cap. step 2 ON Cap. step 2 ON Cap. step 2 OFF Cap. step 2 OFF
Out relay Cap. step 3 ON Cap. step 3 OFF Cap. step 3 OFF Cap. step 3 OFF

Inverse action with sequential step

Compressor Cap. Cap. Cap. Power


step 1 step 2 step 3
0%
25 %
50 %
75 %
100 %

 CO06 = 3 Continuous steps and direct action

Eg: compressor with 3 capacity step.

Capacity 25% 50% 75% 100%


Compr. compressor ON compressor ON compressor ON compressor ON
Out relay Cap. step 3 OFF Cap. step 3 ON Cap. step 3 ON Cap. step 3 ON

Pag. 57 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Out relay Cap. step 2 OFF Cap. step 2 OFF Cap. step 2 ON Cap. step 2 ON
Out relay Cap. step OFF Cap. step OFF Cap. step 1 OFF Cap. step 1 ON

Direct action with sequential step

Compressor Cap. Cap. Cap. Power


step 1 step step 3
2
0%
25 %
50 %
75 %
100 %

ATTENTION
When working with capacity control in sequential step in direct or reverse modes: if the power requested is
50% and 75% the unit turn on also the step 25% that must be enabled to make run the other two.

23.1 Minimum Load Start- Up


Par. CO07: configuration of the start-up with minimum load.
This parameter allows to configure the first capacity step operation mode for alternative compressors and
screw compressors.
CO07=0
First capacity step is used only to start the compressor at the minimum load; the valve is switched on for
CO13 seconds, then it is switche off.

CO07=1
First capacity step is used as lower step of the regulation.

CO07=2 SCREW COMPRESSOR


First capacity step is used only to start the screw compressor at the minimum load; the valve is ON when the
compressor is OFF and it remains ON for CO13 seconds after the switching ON of the compressor.

CO07=3 SCREW COMPRESSOR


First capacity step is used as lower step of the regulation; when the compresor is OFF the valve is ON.

23.2 INTERMITTENT SOLENOID VALVE FOR SCREW COMPRESSOR


Some screw compressors have an intermittent solenoid valve; when the compressor is ON, this valve stays
CO08 ON and CO09 OFF.

24. COMPRESSOR INVERTER CONTROLLED


The signal 0÷10V is given by one of 4 configurable outputs of the Ichill (OUT3÷OUT6).
The compressor inverter controlled can be used only with proportional regulation (parameter St11=0).
Possible unit configuration:
 1 circuit: 1 compressor inverter controlled
 1 circuit: 1 compressor inverter controlled and maximum 2 compressor (managed by relay)
 2 circuits: 1 compressor inverter controlled per circuit
 2 circuits: 1 compressor inverter controlled and maximum 2 compressor (managed by relay) per
circuit

First step to be activated is always the compressor inverter controlled; it will be swiched on when the
regulation requests 100% of the compressor power.

Pag. 58 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

To increase / decrease the power the compressor works by step of 1% of the power; every step is delayed
by CO62 at the start-up of the compressor and CO71 when the compressor works normally.
When the compressor inverter controlled is activated, it works at power configured by CO61 parameter for
CO60 seconds; after that:
 if the parameter CO62=0 the compressor modulates the power according to the regulation request
 the parameter CO620 the compressor is forced to works at maximum power and then it modulates
the power according to the regulation request

It is possible to limit the output % of the inverter compressor in Chiller, Heat pump and Sanitary hot water:
o maximum % output inverter in Chiller (parameter CO79)
o maximum % output inverter in Heat pump (parameter CO80)
o maximum % output inverter in Sanitary hot water (parameter CO81)

COMPRESSOR INVERTER CONTROLLED OPERATING MODE: CHILLER


At the start up the compressor is forced to work at CO61 speed for CO60 seconds.

COMPRESSOR INVERTER CONTROLLED OPERATING MODE: HEAT PUMP


At the start up the compressor is forced to work at CO61 speed for CO60 seconds.

Pag. 59 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

TWO COMPRESSORS INVERTER CONTROLLED OPERATING MODE: CHILLER

TWO COMPRESSORS INVERTER CONTROLLED OPERATING MODE: HEAT PUMP

Pag. 60 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Parameters involved:

CO60 Operation time at CO61 power when the compressor inverter


0 250 sec
controlled is switched on
CO61 Forced power when the compressor inverter controlled is
0 100 %
switched on
CO62 Delay to increase the power during the start up phase of the
1 250 sec
compressori inverter controlled
CO63 Compressor inverter controlled operation power under whitch
0 100 %
start counting CO64 time
CO64 Maximun operation time of the compressor inverter controlled
0 250 Min 10 Min
with power less than CO63
CO65 Operating time of the compressor inverter controlled at
maximum power 0 250 sec 10sec

CO66 Maximum operating time of the compressor inverter controlled


0 999 Hr 1Hr
CO67 Minimum value of the compressor 1 inverter controlled
0 CO68 %
CO68 Maximum value of the compressor 1 inverter controlled
CO67 100 %
CO69 Minimum value of the compressor 2 inverter controlled
0 CO70 %
CO70 Maximum value of the compressor 2 inverter controlled
CO69 100 %
CO71 Delay to increase/decrease the power of the compressori
1 250 sec
inverter controlled
...
CO79 Maximum speed of the inverter compressors in chiller
1 100 %
CO80 Maximum speed of the inverter compressors in heat pump
1 100 %

Pag. 61 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

CO81 Maximum speed of the inverter compressors in sanitary water


1 100 %
CO82 Outside temperature to reduce inverter compressor speed in -
70.0 °C Dec
Heat pump 50.0
158 °F int
-58
50.0 Bar Dec
0.0
725 Psi int
0
CO83 Hysteresis temperature to reduce inverter compressor speed in 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
Heat pump 0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
1 203 Psi int
CO84 Compressor speed if outside temperature > CO82 0 100 %

24.1 Inverter Compressor In Heat Pump And External Temperature


It is possible to reduce the compressor speed (both compressor in parallel if configured) in heat pump when
external temperature increases over a determined temperature.

25. COMPRESSOR RACK


The IC200L can manage a compressor rack; the configuration parameters are Cr01…Cr09.
In this operation mode the controller can manage maximum 6 compressors in only one circuit; only the chiller
mode is enabled and the regulation is only in proportional mode.
The parameter Cr01 allows to enable the compressor rack regulation:
Cr01 = 0 Compressor rack regulation disabled
Cr01 = 1 Compressor rack enabled and regulation on the probe defined by parameter ST09
Cr01 = 2 Compressor rack enabled and regulation on the evaporator trasducer

It is possible to choose the number of compressors the controller can use in case of regulation faulty probe;
the parameter involved is Cr08.
It is possible to choose the number of condenser fan steps the controller can use in case of faulty probe; the
parameter involved is Cr09.

The Energy Saving function, in case of compressor rack unit, has dedicated set point and differential
(parameter Cr06 = “Energy saving offset for compressor rack unit”, Cr07 = “Energy saving differential for
compressor rack unit”)
Graph of the compressors thermoregulation

Pag. 62 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

26. COMPRESSORS WITH DIFFERENT CAPACITY

The function is enabled if:


 one circuit unit
 at least 2 compressor are configured
 the capacity of the compressors is not 0 and different for each one

Parameters involved:

CF87 Compressor 1 capacity 0 100%


CF88 Compressor 2 capacity 0 100%
CF89 Compressor 3 capacity 0 100%
CF90 Compressor 4 capacity 0 100%
CF91 Compressor 5 capacity 0 100%
CF92 Compressor 6 capacity 0 100%
CF93 Maximum number of start up of the compressor in 15 minutes
0 15
0= Not enabled

Example: circuit with 2 compressors:


 step 1: the first compressor to be activated is the compressor with lower weight
 step 2: the compressor is switched off and is activated the compressor with higher weight
 step 3: both compressors are activated

The regulation is a steps; if two compressors with different weight are configured, are available 3 steps
activated in regulation band ST07 or ST08.

ATTENTION:
It is possible to protect the compressor setting a maximum number of activation per hour.

Pag. 63 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

27. CIRCUIT MANAGEMENT: SATURATION OR BALANCING


CIRCUIT SATURATION
CO15 = 0
If the machine has 2 compressors in the circuit 1 and 2 compressors in the circuit 2, the sequence of
activation is:
1st compressor circuit 1 2nd compressor circuit 1  1st compressor circuit 2 2nd compressor circuit 2

CIRCUIT BALANCING
CO15 = 1
If the machine has 2 compressors in the circuit 1 and 2 compressors in the circuit 2, the sequence of
activation is:
st st nd nd
1 compressor circuit 1 1 compressor circuit 2  2 compressor circuit 2 2 compressor circuit 2

28. PUMP DOWN

PUMP DOWN with low pressure switch or pump down pressure switch

CO36 = 1 Pump down enabled during the switching off (low pressure switch or pump down switch)
Before turning off the last compressor, the solenoid valve is closed; the compressor works until the pressure
switch is activated or after a maximum time CO39; in this case an alarm is displayed (b1PH or b2PH) but the
machine continuous to work as normal.
If the alarm occurs more than AL21 times per hour, the Ichill generate a manual alarm.
Low pressure alarm (when the low pressure switch is used) is disabled for AL02 time after valve activation
(AL02=0 the alarm is disabled when the compressor is OFF).
When the first compressor of the circuit is switched on, the solenoid valve is switched on 1 seconds before it.

CO36 = 2 Pump down enabled during the switching off and switching on (low pressure switch or
pump down switch)
Before turning off the last compressor, the solenoid valve is closed; the compressor works until the pressure
switch is activated or after a maximum time CO39; in this case an alarm is displayed (b1PH or b2PH) but the
machine continuous to work as normal.
If the alarm occurs more than AL21 times per hour, the Ichill generate a manual alarm.
Low pressure alarm (when the low pressure switch is used) is disabled for AL02 time after valve activation
(AL02=0 the alarm is disabled when the compressor is OFF).
When the first compressor of the circuit is switched on, the solenoid valve is switched on 1 seconds before it
if the pressure switch is not active.
If the pump down pressure switch remains activeated, the compressors does not restart and after CO39 time
a pump-down alarm is displayed.
The parameter AL23 allows to choose if the pump down alarm (during the switching on) is automatic or
manual reset:
 AL23 =0 automatic reset; the compressor will rester when the pump down pressure switch is active
 AL23=1 manual reset; if the number of pump down alarm per hour is lower than AL22 the reset is
automatic, manual reset; if the number of pump down alarm per hour is higher than AL22 the reset is
manual

PAR. CO36 = 3 Pump down enabled during the switching off only in chiller mode (low pressure
switch or pump down switch)
The pump douwn procedure works as CO36=1 but only in chiller mode; in heat pump mode the solenoid
valve is activated when the first compressor is ON and de-.activated when the last compressor is OFF.

PAR. CO36 = 4 Pump down enabled during the switching off and switching on inly in chiller
mode (low pressure switch or pump down switch)
The pump douwn procedure works as CO36=2 but only in chiller mode; in heat pump mode the solenoid
valve is activated when the first compressor is ON and de-.activated when the last compressor is OFF.

Pag. 64 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

PUMP DOWN with low pressure probe

CO36 = 1 Pump down enabled during the switching off (low pressure probe)
Before turning off the last compressor, the solenoid valve is closed; the compressor works until the pressure
falls below CO37 or after a maximum time CO39; in this case an alarm is displayed (b1PH or b2PH) but the
machine continuous to work as normal.
If the alarm occurs more than AL21 times per hour, the Ichill generate a manual alarm.
Low pressure alarm (when the low pressure switch is used) is disabled for AL02 time after valve activation
(AL02=0 the alarm is disabled when the compressor is OFF).
When the first compressor of the circuit is switched on, the solenoid valve is switched on 1 seconds before it.

CO35 = 2 Pump down enabled during the switching off and switching on (low pressure probe)
Before turning off the last compressor, the solenoid valve is closed; the compressor works until the pressure
falls below CO37 or after a maximum time CO39; in this case an alarm is displayed (b1PH or b2PH) but the
machine continuous to work as normal.
If the alarm occurs more than AL21 times per hour, the Ichill generate a manual alarm.
Low pressure alarm (when the low pressure switch is used) is disabled for AL02 time after valve activation
(AL02=0 the alarm is disabled when the compressor is OFF).
When the first compressor of the circuit is switched on, the solenoid valve is switched on 1 seconds before it.
When the first compressor of the circuit is switched on, the solenoid valve is switched on 1 seconds before it
if the pressure is higher than CO37 + CO38.
If the pressure remains lower than CO37 + CO38 the compressors does not restart and after CO39 time a
pump-down alarm is displayed.
The parameter AL23 allows to choose if the pump down alarm (during the switching on) is automatic or
manual reset:
 AL23 =0 automatic reset; the compressor will rester when the pump down pressure switch is active
 AL23=1 manual reset; if the number of pump down alarm per hour is lower than AL22 the reset is
automatic, manual reset; if the number of pump down alarm per hour is higher than AL22 the reset is
manual

CO36 = 3 Pump down enabled during the switching off only in chiller mode(low pressure probe)
The pump douwn procedure works as CO36=1 but only in chiller mode; in heat pump mode the solenoid
valve is activated when the first compressor is ON and de-.activated when the last compressor is OFF.

CO36 = 4 Pump down enabled during the switching off and switching on only in chiller mode (low
pressure probe)
The pump douwn procedure works as CO36=1 but only in chiller mode; in heat pump mode the solenoid
valve is activated when the first compressor is ON and de-.activated when the last compressor is OFF.

ATTENTION
If the pump down function is enabled, during the unit start-up from digital input as pump down
pressure switch and also from analogue input as low pressure transducer, the compressor will
restart only if both the inputs are satisfied.

Pump Down by TIME


The pump down can be enabled also by time; in this case the compressor is activated after CO58 from
solenoid valve switching on and de-activated after CO59 from solenoid valve switching off.

CO 58 Maximum time for the activation of the pump-down during the


switching off 0 250 Sec
CO58 = 0 Not enabled
CO 59 Maximum time for the activation of the pump-down during the
switching on 0 250 Sec
CO59 = 0 Not enabled

Pag. 65 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

29. UNLOADING

29.1 High Temperature Of The Evaporator Water Inlet


It is possibble to use this function if there are at least 2 steps of power (two compressor or 1 compressor with
partialization) for every circuit or with inverter compressor.

UNLOADING ACTIVATION
When the evaporator water inlet temperature is higher than CO40 for CO42 time, the display shows and
the unit works with the number of compressors selected in CO49 parameter or CO96 speed in case of
inverter compressor.

EXAMPLE
2 circuits and 3 compressors per circuit
6 compressors are running; if CO49 = 2 in case of unloading 2 compressors are switched off and 4
continuous to work.

UNLOAD DE-ACTIVATION
When the evaporator water inlet temperature falls below CO40-CO41 the unloading function is disabled and
all compressor are available to work.

Unloading Information
If the evaporator water inlet temperature remains between CO40 and CO40-CO41, after CO43 time the
unloading function is deactivated.

29.2 Condenser High Pressure, Condenser High Temperature Or Evaporator Low


Pressure

UNLOADING ACTIVATION IN CHILLER MODE


When the condenser pressure or temperature is higher than CO44 the display shows and the unit works
with the number of compressors selected in CO49 parameter or CO96 speed in case of inverter compressor.
If the compressor is a screw compressor the unloading function works at least CO50 time; if CO50 = 0 this
function is disabled.

EXAMPLE
2 circuits and 3 compressors per circuit
6 compressors are running; if CO49 = 2 in case of unloading 2 compressors are switched off and 4
continuous to work.

UNLOADING DE-ACTIVATION IN CHILLER MODE


When the condenser pressure or condenser temperature falls below CO44-CO45 the unloading function is
disabled and all compressor are available to work.

Other information about the Unloading in chiller


If the condenser pressure or condenser temperature remains between CO44 and CO44-CO45, after CO48
time the unloading function is deactivated.

UNLOADING IN HEAT PUMP MODE


The reference probe for this function is the evaporator probe; if any evaporator probe is configured, the
function uses the condenser probe.
When the evaporator/condenser pressure is lower than CO46 the display shows and the unit works with
the number of compressors selected in CO49 parameter or CO96 speed in case of inverter compressor.
If the compressor is a screw compressor the unloading function works at least CO50 time; if CO50 = 0 this
function is disabled.

Pag. 66 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

EXAMPLE
2 circuits and 3 compressors per circuit
6 compressors are running; if CO49 = 2 in case of unloading 2 compressors are switched off and 4
continuous to work.

UNLOADING DE-ACTIVATION in HEAT PUMP MODE


When the evaporator probe (orcondenser pressure or condenser temperature) increase over CO46+CO47
the unloading function is disabled and all compressor are available to work.

Other information about the Unloading in Heat Pump


If the evaporator probe (or condenser pressure or condenser temperature) remains between CO46 and
CO46+CO47, after CO48 time the unloading function is deactivated.

29.3 Low Temperature Of The Evaporator Water Outlet


ACTIVATION
The lower value between the inlet evaporator probe, common outlet evaporator probe or outlet probe for the
circuit, enables the unloading function.
When the value of one of the probes above decrease under the set point CO55 the unloading function is
activated; the number of active compressors/step is determined by the CO49 parameter or CO96 speed in
case of inverter compressor.
The display shows the label b1EU – b2EU alternated to a default visualization.

DE-ACTIVATION
Unloading function is disabled when the temperature of all the probes configured rise over CO55 + CO56 or
when the CO57 time is elapsed.

30. SOLENOID VALVE FOR LIQUID INJECTION


It is possible to configure 2 valves for the liquid injection of the screw compressor (compressor 1 and
compressor 2).
When the compressor is off the solenoid valve is always OFF. When the compressor is on:
 if the temperature detected by the probe mounted in the compressor increases over CO51 setpoint,
the valve is switched on
 if the temperature detected by the probe mounted in the compressor decreases under C51-CO52
the valve is switched off.

31. EVAPORATOR WATER PUMP / SUPPLY FAN (AIR/AIR UNIT)


Water pump / supply fan operation mode:

CO16=0: Not enabled: water pump/supply fan is not managed.


Attention: The air / air unit configured with CO16= 0 does not manage the output for integration heaters.

CO16 = 1: Continuous control


The water pump / supply fan is ON only if the unit is running (chiller or heat pump).
When the Ichill is switched on in chiller or heat pump, the water pump is immediately activated and the first
compressor is switched on after CO17 delay.
When the Ichill is in STD-BY or remote OFF the water pump is OFF (with a delay if CO18>0).
The parameter Ar09 allows to set the status of the water pump in case of antifreeze if the Ichill is in stand-by.

CO16 = 2: on compressor demand


The water pump / supply fan is ON only if at least a compressor is ON; in case of compressor activation, the
water pump is switched on CO17 before the compressor.

Pag. 67 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

When the last compressor is switched off, the water pump / supply fan is switched off after CO18 delay from
compressor.
When the unit is in stand-by or remote off and the Ar09 =1, if the regulation requires the antifreeze heaters
also the water pump is turned on.

The pump is always off when:


 Remote OFF from digital input.
 Water pump overload.
 Evaporator flow switch alarm if MANUAL reset.

During the defrost and when the compressor is off in dripping time the water pump/supply fan is on.

31.1 Evaporator Pump Group


It is possible to configure two evaporator water pumps; the water pump to be activated is the pump with less
working hours.
When a water pump works continuosly for CO19 time, the other one is switched on and after CO20 second
the first one is switched off.
If a water pump overload occurs, the water pump is switched off and the other one is switched on.

Note: During the defrost and when the compressor is off in dripping time, the pump is on.

31.2 Modulating Evaporator Water Pump


To enable the modulating evaporator water pump is necessary to configure an analog output as “Modulated
evaporator water pump” (see analog and digital output configuration) .
The modulating evaporator water pump is enabled in cooling, heating and sanitary hot water production; if
the machine is in STD-BY or OFF the water pump is OFF.

The water pump works according the Dt between two probes, which can be choosen both in summer an
winter mode, among those configured in the instrument (Pb1, Pb2,…).
If the state of the water pump is tied to the state of the compressor, when last compressor is switched off the
water pump is forced to run at US60 speed for CO18 minutes, then it is switched off.
If the state of the water pump is not tied to the state of the compressor, when last compressor is switched off
the water pump is forced to run at US60 speed.

The regulation is done as showed below.

Chiller and chiller + sanitary hot water (machine with valves OUt1 and OUT2 in the gas circuit)

Pag. 68 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Parameter Description min max udm


US 47 Probe 1 selection for evaporator water pump modulation in chiller 0 10
US 48 Probe 2 selection for evaporator water pump modulation in chiller 0 10
US 49 Set point for maximum speed of modulationg evaporator water pump in chiller 30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-58 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 Psi int
US 50 Proportional band for maximum speed of modulationg evaporator water pump 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
in chiller 0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
0 203 Psi int
US 51 Minimum speed of the evaporator water pump in chiller 0 100 %
US 52 Maximum speed of the evaporator water pump in chiller 0 100 %

Heat pump and sanitary hot water

Parameter Description min max udm


US 53 Probe 1 selection for evaporator water pump modulation in Heat Pump 0 10
US 54 Probe 2 selection for evaporator water pump modulation in Heat Pump 0 10
US 55 Set point for maximum speed of modulationg evaporator water pump in Heat 30.0 70.0 °C Dec
Pump -58 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 Psi int
US 56 Proportional band for maximum speed of modulationg evaporator water pump 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
in Heat Pump 0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
0 203 Psi int
US 57 Minimum speed of the evaporator water pump in Heat Pump 0 100 %
US 58 Maximum speed of the evaporator water pump in Heat Pump 0 100 %

32. WATER PUMP OF THE CONDENSER


Condenser Water pump control

Water pump operation mode:

CO21=0: Not enabled: water pump is not managed.

CO21 = 1: Continuous control


The water pump is ON only if the unit is running (chiller or heat pump).

Pag. 69 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

When the Ichill is switched on in chiller or heat pump, the water pump is immediately activated and the first
compressor is switched on after CO17 delay.
When the Ichill is in STD-BY or remote OFF the water pump is OFF (with a delay if CO23>0).
The parameter Ar09 allows to set the status of the water pump in case of antifreeze if the Ichill is in stand-by.

CO21 = 2: on compressor demand


The water pump is ON only if at least a compressor is ON; in case of compressor activation, the water pump
is switched on CO17 before the compressor.
When the last compressor is switched off, the water pump is switched off after CO23 delay from compressor.
When the unit is in stand-by or remote off and the Ar09 =1, if the regulation requires the antifreeze heaters
also the water pump is turned on.

The pump is always off when:


 Remote OFF from digital input.
 Water pump overload.
 Condenser flow switch alarm if MANUAL reset.

During the defrost and when the compressor is off in dripping time the water pump/supply fan is on.

32.1 Condenser Pump Group


It is possible to configure two condenser water pumps; the water pump to be activated is the pump with less
working hours.
When a water pump works continuosly for CO24 time, the other one is switched on and after CO25 second
the first one is switched off.
If a water pump overload occurs, the water pump is switched off and the other one is switched on.

33. CYCLIC OPERATION OF THE WATER PUMPS

If the water pump is OFF (reached set point), is possible to enable it to run to detect the right water
temperature.
At the end of the ON time, the controller verify if is necessary to switch on the compressor/s or not; if is not
necessary, the water pump is switched OFF for CO85 time and then switched on for another CO87 ON
cycle.

Parameters Description min max unit of


measure
CO 85 Evaporator water pump OFF time if the set point is reached 0 250 10 min
CO 86 Evaporator water pump OFF time if the machine is STD-BY or
0 250 10 hour
OFF
CO 87 Evaporator water pump ON time 0 250 10 Sec
CO 88 Condenser water pump OFF time if the set point is reached 0 250 10 min
CO 89 Condenser water pump OFF time if the machine is STD-BY or
0 250 10 hour
OFF

Pag. 70 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

CO 90 Condenser water pump ON time 0 250 10 Sec

34. HOT START


In the air air unit and in heating mode it is possible to stop the supply fan when the outlet evaporator
temperature falls below FA24 degrees.

FA24 Hot start Setpoint


FA25 Hot start differential

35. LOAD MAINTENANCE


It is possible to determine for each load (compressors and water pumps) the number of working hours after
witch the display will show a maintenance warning.

Parameters CO26..CO31: number of working hour of the compressors


Parameters CO32..CO33: number of working hour of the evaporator water pump
Parameters CO34..CO35: number of working hour of the condenser water pump
Parameters CO73: number of working hour of the sanitary water pump
Parameters CO74: number of working hour of the solar panel water pump
Parameters CO95: number of working hour of the free cooling water pump

If the parameter is set to 0, the maintenance signalling is disabled but the running hours counter remains
active.

36. CONDENSER FAN REGULATION


The signal to drive the modulating condenser fan is available in the PWM outputs (TF1 and TF2 in the
connection diagram) or in the Out 1 and Out2; for these output the parameters that allows to choose the
signal are:
CF68 Condenser fan circuit 1
CF68=0 0..10V
CF68=1 4..20mA
CF68=2 PWM

CF69 Condenser fan circuit 2


CF69=0 0..10V
CF69=1 4..20mA
CF69=2 PWM

Pag. 71 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

FA01 and FA02 parameters define the operative mode of the condenser fans.
Par. FA01 Fan regulation
0 = Output not enabled
1 = Always on
2 = ON/OFF step regulation
3 = ON/OFF continuous step regulation
4 = proportional fan speed
Par. FA02 Condenser fan operation mode
0 = Fan on only if compressor on
1 = Independent from the compressor and off during the stand–by / or from remote OFF

Example:
Par. FA01 = 1 / Par. FA02 = 0
Fans on when the compressor on (the fans work following the same output algorithm)

Par. FA01 = 1 / Par. FA02 = 1


Independent from the compressor status but off in stand–by.

Par. FA01 = 2 / Par. FA02 = 0


Fans on, with ON/OFF regulation and with temperature/pressure transducer control, only when the
compressor is on (at least one relay is configured as fan control). When the compressor turns off also the
fans are forced off.

Par. FA01 = 2 / Par. FA02 = 1


Fans on, with ON/OFF regulation and with temperature/pressure transducer control, only when the
compressor is on (at least one relay is configured as fan control). When the compressor turns off the fans are
thermoregulated depending on the condensing temperature/pressure.

Par. FA01 = 3 / Par. FA02 = 0


Fans on, with ON/OFF continuos regulation and with temperature/pressure transducer control, only when the
compressor is on (at least one relay is configured as fan control). When the compressor turns off also the
fans are forced off.

Par. FA01 = 3 / Par. FA02 = 1


Fans on, with ON/OFF continuos regulation and with temperature/pressure transducer control, only when the
compressor is on (at least one relay is configured as fan control). When the compressor turns off the fans are
thermoregulated depending on the condensing temperature/pressure.

Par. FA01 = 4 / Par. FA02 = 0


Fans on, with proportional regulation (PWM, 4..20mA, 0.10V) and with temperature/pressure transducer
control, only when the compressor is on. When the compressor turns off also the fans are forced off.

Par. FA01 = 4 / Par. FA02 = 2


Fans on in proportional regulation (PWM, 4..20mA or 0..10V) according to condenser temperature/pressure
(only when the compressor is on).
When the compressor turns off the fans are thermoregulated depending on the condensing
temperature/pressure.

36.1 Output Step Rele’ Condenser Fan


Par FA01 = 2 ON/OFF step regulation

E.G.: 1 circuit and 4 step of ventilation

OUT relè step n° 1 step n° 2 step n° 3 step n° 4


Out relè step n° 1 ON OFF OFF OFF
Out relè step n° 2 OFF ON OFF OFF
Out relè step n° 3 OFF OFF ON OFF
Out relè step n° 4 OFF OFF OFF ON

Pag. 72 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Par FA01 = 3 ON/OFF continuous step regulation

E.G.: 1 circuit and 4 step of ventilation

Continuous step regulation

OUT relè Gradino n° 1 Gradino n° 2 Gradino n° 3 Gradino n° 4


Out relè step n° 1 ON ON ON ON
Out relè step n° 2 OFF ON ON ON
Out relè step n° 3 OFF OFF ON ON
Out relè step n° 4 OFF OFF OFF ON

36.2 Pwm Output For Fan Control


When the condenser fan is switched on it works at maximum speed for FA03 time, then it modulate
according to condenser pressure/temperature or evaporator pressure (heat pump mode).
F04 parameter allows to adapt the signal to the motor (current-voltage phase displacement of a line-powered
ac load).
If FA01=3, when the compressor starts-up and the proportional regulation requires to turn off the fan (cut-
off), if FA140 the fan is forced at the minimum speed for the time set in FA14 itself (if FA14=0 the function is
disabled).

36.3 Condensing Unit: Common Or Separate Condenser


FA05 defines the condenser unit
Par. FA05 type of condenser
FA05=0 Common condenser unit
FA05=1 Separate condenser units
If FA05= 0 the condenser fan of the circuit 1 and circuit 2 works in parallel:
 CHILLER mode: the regulation probe is the probe that has the higher value
 HEAT PUMP mode: the regulation probe is the probe that has the lower value

36.4 Proportional Regulation Of Condenser Fans


Condenser fan in Chiller mode.

Condenser fan in Heat pump mode.

Pag. 73 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

36.5 On/Off Regulation Of Condenser Fans

Condenser fan in Chiller mode.

Condenser fan in Heat pump mode.

36.6 Pre-Ventilation And Post-Ventilation


Pre-ventilation:

Pag. 74 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

in chiller and heat pump mode when first compressor is swtiched on if FA06>0 and/or FA30>0 the fan runs at
maximum speed for FA06 and/or FA30.
Post-ventilation:
in heat pump mode if FA31>0 and outside temperature > FA32, when last compressor is switched off the
condenser fan (if on at that moment) is forced at FA33 speed for FA31 seconds (outside temperature probe
is required).

37. ANTI FREEZE HEATERS, INTEGRATION HEATING OR BOILER


Regulation of the heaters in chiller
The Par. Ar06 selects the probe/s control for the anti-freeze relay outputs configured as anti-freeze / support
/ boiler heaters for the circuits 1 and 2 in chiller mode.
Par. Ar06 = 0: the function is disabled
Par. Ar06 = 1: function enabled; the regulation probe is evaporator water inlet.
Par. Ar06 = 2: function enabled; the regulation probe are evaporator water outlet circuit 1 and evaporator
water outlet circuit 2.
ATTENTION: It is not possible to control the heaters of the circuit #1 with the probe of the circuit #2 and
viceversa.
Par. Ar06 = 3: function enabled; the regulation probe are evaporator water outlet circuit 1, evaporator water
outlet circuit 2 or evaporator common probe.
Par. Ar06 = 4: function enabled; the regulation probe is outside temperature.

Regulation of the heaters in heat pump


The Par. Ar07 selects the probe/s control for the anti-freeze alarm and the relay outputs configured as anti-
freeze / support / boiler heaters for the circuits 1 and 2 in heat pump mode.
Par. Ar07 = 0: the function is disabled
Par. Ar07 = 1: function enabled; the regulation probe is evaporator water inlet.
Par. Ar07 = 2: function enabled; the regulation probe are evaporator water outlet circuit 1 and evaporator
water outlet circuit 2.
ATTENTION: It is not possible to control the heaters of the circuit #1 with the probe of the circuit #2 and
viceversa.

Par. Ar07 = 3: function enabled; the regulation probe are evaporator water outlet circuit 1, evaporator water
outlet circuit 2 or evaporator common probe.
Par. Ar07 = 4: function enabled; the regulation probe is outside temperature.

ANTI-FREEZE HEATERS, INTEGRATION HEATING, BOILER HEATERS DURING THE DEFROST


CYCLE
The Ar05 parameter allows to choose the operation mode of the heaters during the defrost:
Par. Ar05 = 0: The heaters are activated according the regulation request.
Par. Ar05 = 1: The heaters are activated only by the regulation request and are always on during the defrost.
The heaters are switched on when the 4-way valve change from heat-pump to chiller and switched off only
after the dripping time and the compressors restart.

Condenser Anti-freeze heaters regulation


The parameter Ar08 allows to select the heaters probe control in chiller and heat pump mode.
Par. Ar08 = 0: the function is disabled.
Par. Ar08 = 1: function enabled; the regulation probe is condenser water inlet.
Par. Ar08 = 2: function enabled; the regulation probe are condenser water inlet circuit 1, condenser water
inlet circuit 2 and condenser water common inlet.
ATTENTION: It is not possible to control the heaters of the circuit #1 with the probe of the circuit #2 and
viceversa.
Par. Ar08 = 3: function enabled; the regulation probe are evaporator water outlet circuit 1, evaporator water
outlet circuit 2
Par. Ar08 = 4: function enabled; the regulation probe are evaporator water outlet circuit 1, evaporator water
outlet circuit 2 and condenser common outlet.

Pag. 75 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

ATTENTION
When the outputs are configured as heaters circuit #1 and 2 they are both controlled by the NTC probe of
the common condenser outlet.

Graph of the anti-freeze- integration heating - boiler heater relays

Boiler function
The function is enabled when:
 One probe is configured as outside temperature.
 Parameter Ar11 > 0.

Ar11=1 Boiler in integration mode


When outside temperature decreases under the Ar12 setpoint, the Ar14 delay starts counting. If during the
Ar14 counting the external air increases above the Ar12 + Ar13 (differential) the function is aborted and the
Ar14 time is reloaded.
When the time Ar14 is elapsed and the external air temperature is still under the Ar12 setpoint, if the water
temperature detected by the evaporator probe is lower than Ar15 in chiller mode or Ar17 in heat pump mode,
the heaters are turned on.
When the temperature rises over Ar15 + Ar16 in chiller mode or Ar17+Ar18 in heat pump the heaters are
turned off.
If the heaters are on, when the outside temperature increases over Ar12 + Ar13, they are turned off and the
Ar14 delay is reloaded.
Attention
If outside temperature falls blow Ar19 setpoint, the compressors are switched off; they can restart if the
outside temperature increase over Ar19+Ar20.

Heating control Ar11=2


When outside temperature decreases under the Ar12 setpoint, the Ar14 delay starts counting.
If during this delay the outside temperature increase over the Ar12+Ar13 the process is aborted and the time
Ar14 reloaded.
When the time Ar14 is elapsed and the external air temperature is still under the Ar12 setpoint, if the water
temperature detected by the evaporator probe is lower than Ar15 in chiller mode or Ar17 in heat pump mode,
the heaters are turned on and the compressor(s) and the condensing fan(s) are turned off. The heating is
made only by the heaters.
When outside temperature increase over Ar15+Ar16 or Ar15 + Ar17 the heaters are turned off.
If the outside temperature increase over Ar12 +Ar13, the heaters are turned off, the compressor regulation
restarts, the Ar14 delay is reloaded.

BOILER HEATERS DURING the DEFROST CYCLE


The Ar05 parameters defines the tatus of the heaters during the defrost:
Ar05=0 Heaters activated accordingb the regulation
Ar05=1 The heaters are switched on when the 4-way valve changes the status from heat pump to chiller and
switched off after the dripping time at the end of the defrost.

ATTENTION
The heaters of the boiler are always off in case of:
 flow switch alarm
 water pump overload alarm

Pag. 76 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

38. AUXILIARY RELAYS


Par. uS01 configuration auxiliary relay 1
Par. uS05 configuration auxiliary relay 2
0 = Not enabled
1 = Function enabled, direct action, also if the Ichill is in stand-by or remote off.
2 = Function enabled, direct action, only if the Ichill is on in chiller or heat pump (not in stand-by or remote
off)
3 = Function enabled, inverse action, also if the Ichill is in stand-by or remote off
4 = Function enabled, inverse action, only if the Ichill is on in chiller or heat pump (not in stand-by or remote
off).
To configure the regulation of the auxiliary relay, please refer to uS parameters.

Auxiliary relay with direct action

Auxiliary relay with inverse action

US 1 Auxiliary relay 1 operating mode


0= Not enabled
1= Always available with direct action
0 4
2= Available only when the unit is on with direct action
3= Always available with reverse action
4= Available only when the unit is on with reverse action
US 2 Analog input configuration for auxiliary relay 1 control. Allows to select which probe value
1 10
Pb1..Pb10 controls the relay
US 3 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US5
0.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 summer minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 4 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US5
50.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 summer maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 5 °C Dec
°F int
US3 US4
Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 summer set point Psi int
US 6 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US8
0.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 winter minimum set point 0 Psi int

Pag. 77 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

US 7 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US8
50.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 winter maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 8 °C Dec
°F int
US6 US7
Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 winter set point Psi int
US 9 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 summer differential 1 203 Psi int
US 10 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 winter differential 1 203 Psi int
US 11 Auxiliary relay 2 operating mode
0= Not enabled
1= Always available with direct action
0 4
2= Available only when the unit is on with direct action
3= Always available with reverse action
4= Available only when the unit is on with reverse action
US 12 Analogue input configuration for auxiliary relay 2 control . Allows to select which probe
1 10
value Pb1..Pb10 controls the relay
US 13 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US15
0.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 summer minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 14 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US15
50.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 summer maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 15 °C Dec
°F int
US13 US14
Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 summer set point Psi int
US 16 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US18
0.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 winter minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 17 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US18
50.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 winter maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 18 °C Dec
°F int
US16 US17
Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 winter set point Psi int
US 19 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 summer differential 1 203 Psi int
US 20 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 winter differential 1 203 Psi int
US 21 Maximum operating time of auxiliary realys 0 250 min
...
US 61 AUX 1 relay operation mode
1= only in Chiller
1 3
2= only in Heat pump
3= in Chiller and Heat pump
US 62 AUX 2 relay operation mode
1= only in Chiller
1 3
2= only in Heat pump
3= in Chiller and Heat pump

39. AUXILIARY PROPORTIONAL OUTPUTS


The outputs OUT 3 .. OUT 6 can be configured as proportional output.
Each output is managed with a dedicated temperature or pressure probe; the parameters involved in the
probe selection are uS23 for the output 1 and uS35 for the output 2.
The function is enabled when the parameter uS22>0 for the output 1 and the parameter uS34>0 for the
output 2 and at least one output is configured as auxiliary output.
Par. uS22 configuration auxiliary output 1
Par. uS34 configuration auxiliary output 2
Value and function
0 = Not enabled

Pag. 78 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

1 = Function enabled, direct action, enabled also in stand-by and remote off
2 = Function enabled, direct action, enabled only if the Ichill is working in chiller or heat pump
3 = Function enabled, inverse action, enabled also in stand-by and remote off
4 = Function enabled, inverse action, enabled only if the Ichill is working in chiller or heat pump

Auxiliary Proportional output: Direct action

US46=0

US46=1

Auxiliary Proportional output: Inverse action

US46=0

US46=1

Pag. 79 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

US 22 Auxiliary proportional output n° 1 operating mode


0= Not enabled
1= Always available with direct action
0 4
2= Available only when the unit is on with direct action
3= Always available with reverse action
4= Available only when the unit is on with reverse action
US 23 Analogue input configuration for auxiliary control 1
1 10
Allows to select which probe value Pb1..Pb10 controls output
US 24 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US26
0.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 summer minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 25 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US26
50.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 summer maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 26 °C Dec
°F int
US24 US25
Bar Dec
Analog output 1 summer set point Psi int
US 27 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US29
0.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 winter minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 28 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US29
50.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 winter maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 29 °C Dec
°F int
US27 US28
Bar Dec
Analog output 1 winter set point Psi int
US 30 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 summer differential 0 203 Psi int
US 31 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 winter differential 0 203 Psi int
US 32 Analog output 1 minimum value 0 US33 %
US 33 Analog output 1 maximum value US32 100 %
US 34 Auxiliary proportional output n° 2 operating mode
0= Not enabled
1= Always available with direct action
0 4
2= Available only when the unit is on with direct action
3= Always available with reverse action
4= Available only when the unit is on with reverse action
US 35 Analogue input configuration for auxiliary 2 control
1 10
Allows to select which probe value Pb1..Pb10 controls output

Pag. 80 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

US 36 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US38
0.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 summer minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 37 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US38
50.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 summer maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 38 °C Dec
°F int
US36 US37
Bar Dec
Analog output 2 summer set point Psi int
US 39 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US41
0.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 winter minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 40 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US41
50.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 winter maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 41 °C Dec
°F int
US39 US40
Bar Dec
Analog output 2 winter set point Psi int
US 42 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 summer differential 0 203 Psi int
US 43 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 winter differential 0 203 Psi int
US 44 Analog output 2 minimum value 0 US45 %
US 45 Analog output 2 maximum value US44 100 %
US 46 Operation mode under minimum value 0 1
...
US 63 AUX 1 analog output operation mode
1= only in Chiller
1 3
2= only in Heat pump
3= in Chiller and Heat pump
US 64 AUX 2 analog output operation mode
1= only in Chiller
1 3
2= only in Heat pump
3= in Chiller and Heat pump

40. DEFROST CYCLE


The following condition are mandatory to enable the defrost:
 The Ichill has to be configured as Heat pump unit
 DF01>0 (defrost enabled)

dF01 Defrost configuration:


0= Not enabled
1= Start and stop for temperature / pressure
2= Start depends on probe selected by par. dF24 and stop for time duration (dF05)
3= Start depends on probe selected by par. dF24 and stop for external contact
4= Defrost only with condenser fan
5= Start from digital input and stop on probe selected by par. dF24

40.1 Automatic Defrost Procedure


Phase 1

Pag. 81 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

When the condenser temperature/pressure or evaporating pressure falls below dF02 and at least one
compressor is ON, the delay between two defrost dF09 starts counting.
The display of the keyboard shows the symbol blinkking.
dF09 counter is reloaded in case of power down, after a defrost cycle, when the Ichill change the operation
mode (from heat pump to chiller) or when the Ichill is in STD-BY or remote OFF.
dF09 counter is stopped if the last compressor of the circuit is turned off or if the pressure-temperature of the
condensing-evaporating probe increase over dF02.

Phase 2
When dF09 counter is elapsed the defrost procedure starts.
If one digital input is configured as “end defrost” is active, the unit waits until the contact is de-activated.
If one probe is configured as combined defrost:
 If the combined defrost probe of the 1st circuit is lower than dF10 and/or the combined defrost probe of
the circuit 2 is lower than dF12, the process proceeds to phase 3.
st
 If the combined defrost probe of the 1 circuit is higher than dF10 and/or the combined defrost probe of
the circuit 2 is higher than dF12, the process doesn’t proceed to phase 3

Phase 3
If dF07=0 the reversiong valve is activated without stopping any conmpressor and the defrost cycle is
immediately activated.
If df07>0:
1. Compressors are turned off
2. After dF07 / 2 the reversing valve is activated;
3. After dF07 / 2 the compressor is activated; if dF14=1 and / or dF15=1 all the compressor are activated
(with a delay of dF16).

Phase 4
Defrost ON
Condenser fan management:
 If dF17=0: condenser fan are always off;
 If dF17=1: condenser fans start if the condensing temperature-pressure value is higher than dF18 and
the regulation is the standard chiller regulation.

ATTENTION
The condenser fan is controlled by the condensing probe even if the evaporator probe is present and
configured.

The phase 4 lasts at least dF04 time; phase 4 ends:


1. If dF01=1:
 the combined probe is higher than dF11 of the 1st circuit;
 the combined probe is higher than dF13 of the 2nd circuit;
 when the condensing temperature/pressure is higher than dF03
2. If dF401=2: when dF05 counter is elapsed
3. If dF01=3: when the digital input configured as end defrost is deactivated

PHASE 5
If dF08 = 0 the reversing valve is switched without stopping the compressors and the defrost ends.
If dF08 > 0:
1. All the compressors are switched off
2. After dF08 / 2 reversing valve is de-activated
3. After dF08 / 2 the heat pump regulation can restart

40.2 Other Information About The Defrost


If the unit is configured with one condenser FA05=0, the defrost of the two circuits starts at the same time.
ATTENTION
rd
Before starting the 3 phase, the dF06 counting, time delay between two circuits defrost, must be expired.
If the defrost ends because of the dF05 counting (Maximum defrost time) and the dF02 configuration or with
the end defrost contact, the bottom display will show, alternated with the normal measurement value, the
label b1dF (circuit #1) or b2dF (circuit #2) labels to indicate the defrost end alarms.

Pag. 82 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

40.3 Forced Defrost


The function is enabled if the parameter dF19>0. It allows to make a forced defrost cycle even if the dF09
timeout counting is not expired, when the condensing/evaporating temperature/pressure is lower than dF20
setpoint for the dF19 time counting.
If during the dF19 time counting the condensing/evaporating temperature/pressure rises above the value
dF20+dF21 (set+differential) the function is disabled and the tF19 time is reloaded.

ATTENTION: the forced defrost is not related to the dF09 /dF06 delay times, therefore the forced defrost cycle, if condition are OK, is
immediately executed.

40.4 Combined Defrost


The function is enabled if one of the digital input is configured as NTC temperature for combined defrost of
the 1st or 2nd circuit. This probe detects the external air temperature of the condenser (evaporator in heat
pump) and its temperature value determines the start and the stop of the defrost cycle.
Description:
The defrost count-down starts when the temperature/pressure of the probe, configured as
condensing/evaporating circuit 1 or 2 probe, is lower than dF02 parameter.
After the dF09 counting the instruments checks the temperature probe value (configured as combined
defrost circuit 1 or 2) and if it is lower than dF10 (temperature setpoint to start the defrost of the circuit 1) or
dF12 (temperature setpoint to start the defrost of the circuit 2) the defrost cycle starts, otherwise the unit still
runs in heat pump mode.
When the temperature decreases under the dF10 or dF12 values the defrost immediately start.
The defrost ends when the NTC combined defrost probe 1 or 2 increases over dF11 (circuit1) or dF13
(circuit2).

40.5 Manual Defrost


The manual defrost key function is enabled if the unit is on with at least one compressor running.
The defrost start temperature/pressure of the controlled probe must be lower than dF02 setpoint value while
if the combined defrost is active the detected temperature must be lower than dF10 or dF12.
At this point by pushing key in the “Defrost status of the circuit” visualization, the defrost starts.

ATTENTION: the manual defrost is not related to the dF09 /dF06 delay times, therefore the forced defrost
cycle, if condition are OK, is immediately executed for both circuits.

40.6 Defrost In Unit With Two Circuits


40.6.1 Start defrost in unit with common condenser
Parameter involved: dF22
0= Independent
1= Only if both circuit conditions are satisfied
2= At least one circuit condition is satisfied

40.6.2 End defrost in unit with two condenser


Parameter involved: dF23
0= Independent
1= Both circuits have reached the conditions to stop the defrost
2= At least one circuit has reached the end defrost condition

Common condensation: possibile configuration

Parametri dF23=0 dF23=1 dF23=2


dF22=0 not possible (ACF1) not possible (ACF1) not possible (ACF1)
dF22=1 not possible (ACF1) YES YES
dF22=2 not possible (ACF1) YES not possible (ACF1)

Separate condensation: possibile configuration

Pag. 83 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Parameter dF23=0 dF23=1 dF23=2


dF22=0 YES not possible (ACF1) not possible (ACF1)
dF22=1 YES YES YES
dF22=2 not possible (ACF1) YES not possible (ACF1)

ATTENTION:
The configuration error ACF1 is displayed if the parameter value of dF22 and dF23 is not permitted.
For only one condensing unit the dF22 and dF23 values must be not equal to 0.

40.7 Defrost With Condenser Fan Procedure

DEFROST WITH CONDENSER FANS


If dF01 = 4 defrost is activated only through the condenser fans.
If the temperature detected by the probe configured as external air temperature > dF26, instead of reverse
the cycle, the compressor is stopped and is activated the condenser fan.
The defrost ends:

 If the combined defrost is ON, for temperature or max time


 If only NTC probes are configured, for temperature or max time
 If only pressure probes are configured, for max time

ATTENTION:
also if the defrost through condenser fan is activated, if the external temperature < dF26, the defrost is
through hot gas (compressor ON).

If dF17 = 2 during dripping time (dF08 if different from 0) the ventilation is forced for the time set on dF08
only if the temperature detected by the probe configured as external temperature is > of the Par. dF26 value.
ATTENTION:
With defrost with only ventilation enabled the forced defrost is always with hot gas.

40.8 Defrost Parameter Description


ATTENTION IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO DO MODIFY THE dF PARAMETERS WHEN THE DEROST
CYCLE IS RUNNING.
dF01 Defrost mode
0 = Defrost not enabled;
1 = Temperature/pressure defrost. The dF09 “Time delay to defrost” starts to decrease when the
temperature/pressure decreases under the dF02 setpoint.
The defrost ends when pressure/temperature reaches the end defrost temperature/pressure.
2 = Time duration defrost. The dF09, time delay to the defrost, starts when the temperature decreases under
the dF02 setpoint (see start probe par. dF24). The defrost cycle ends after dF05 minutes.
3 = Defrost starts when the temperature/pressure decreases under the dF02 setpoint (see start probe par.
dF24) and stops when the digital input configured as “digital input to start defrost” is active. The delay dF09
“Time delay to defrost” starts when the temperature decreases under the dF02 set point. The Defrost cycle
ends when the digital input is active.
4 = Defrost with condenser fan
5= Defrost starts if the digital input configured as “digital input to start defrost” is active and ends when
pressure/temperature reaches the end defrost temperature/pressure.
dF02 Temperature / pressure to begin the time counting to next defrost.
It allows to program a setpoint under which the dF09 starts counting.
dF03 Temperature / pressure to end the defrost.
It allows to program a temperature/pressure setpoint value to determines the end of the defrost when the
probe value is rising.
dF04 Minimum duration of the defrost
It determines the minimum defrost time duration after starting the defrost itself even if the conditions are not
more satisfied.
dF05 Maximum duration of the defrost

Pag. 84 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

If dF01=2, it determines the maximum duration of the defrost and even if, for the other cases, the end
defrost condition are still to be satisfied.
dF06 defrost delay time between the 1st and the 2nd circuit.
nd
After the interval dF09 determined by the defrost request of one of the circuits the other 2 circuits must wait
also the time dF06 before defrosting.
dF07 Compressor off time before the defrost (the led of the compressor is blinking)
After the dF09 delay and before activating the defrost, the compressors are stopped for the dF07 time.
Exactly in the middle of the dF07 time the 4-way valve is activated to equalise the pressure of the unit and when dF07 is completely
expired the compressors and the defrost can start.
This procedure does not respect the compressor on delay protection therefore the compressor is
immediately turned off and then on. If dF07 = 0 the compressor is not stopped and the 4-way valve is
immediately turned.
dF08 Compressor off time after the defrost (the led of the compressor is blinking)
After the defrost cycle the compressors are stopped for the dF08 time.
Exactly in the middle of the dF07 time the 4-way valve is activated to equalise the pressure of the unit and to
drain the external exchange unit, when dF08 is completely expired the unit restart in heat pump mode.
This procedure does not respect the compressor on delay protection therefore the compressor is
immediately turned off and then on. If dF08 = 0 the compressor is not stopped and the 4-way valve is
immediately turned.
DF09 Delay time to next defrost
It starts when the condensing/evaporating temperature/pressure probe value is lower than dF02 setpoint.
This time is reloaded if the power supply fails, after a defrost cycle or from a digital input request of defrost.
The time counting is interrupted if the compressor is turned off or if the temperature/pressure is higher then
dF02.
dF10 Temperature setpoint to start a combined defrost of the circuit #1.
It allows to set a temperature value to determines the beginning of a combined defrost.
After the dF09 counting the NTC probe of the combined defrost of the circuit #1 is compared to the dF10
setpoint, if the value is lower the defrost starts otherwise the unit runs in heat pump mode and when the
temperature decreases under dF10 the defrost immediately starts.
dF11 Temperature setpoint to end a combined defrost of the circuit #1.
It allows to set a temperature value to determine the end of a combined defrost.
When the NTC probe of the combined defrost of the circuit #1 becomes higher than dF10 setpoint the defrost
cycle stops.
dF12 Temperature setpoint to start a combined defrost of the circuit #2.
It allows to set a temperature value to determine the beginning of a combined defrost.
After the dF09 counting the NTC probe of the combined defrost of the circuit #2 is compared to the dF12
setpoint, if the value is lower the defrost starts otherwise the unit runs in heat pump mode and when the
temperature decreases under dF12 the defrost immediately starts.
dF13 Temperature setpoint to end a combined defrost of the circuit #2.
It allows to set a temperature value to determine the end of a combined defrost.
When the NTC probe of the combined defrost of the circuit #2 becomes higher than dF13 setpoint the defrost cycle stops.
dF14 All the resources on during the defrost of the circuit #1
0= Not enabled
1= Enabled
dF15 All the resources on during the defrost of the circuit #2
0= Not enabled
1= Enabled
dF16 Compressor step delay time in defrost.
dF17 Condensing fan control during defrost and dripping cycle
0= Not enabled
1 = Enabled in defrost
2= Enabled in defrost and in dripping time
If dF17 = 0: During the defrost the fan control is not active.
If dF17 = 1: when the condensing temperature/pressure value increases over dF18 the fans are turned on.
the fan control is determined by the same algorithm used in chiller mode.
If dF17 = 2: during the dripping time (dF08 <>0) the fan are turned on for the time duration set in dF08 .
dF18 Pressure / temperature setpoint to force the fans on during the defrost
When the temperature/pressure rises over this value the fan are turned on at the maximum speed.
dF19 Time delay before starting a forced defrost
It determines a delay time before starting the defrost cycle
dF20 Temperature / pressure setpoint to force a defrost

Pag. 85 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

It determines a temperature/pressure setpoint under which the dF19 starts counting, when dF19 is expired if
the temperature/pressure is still lower than dF20 the defrost is immediately executed.
ATTENTION If during the dF19 counting the temperature rises over df20+dF21(differential) the process is
aborted and the dF19 time reloaded.
dF21 Forced defrost differential
dF22 defrost mode for unit with two circuits
Operative mode:
0= Independent
1= The condition are satisfied in both circuits
2= At least one circuit has reached the start condition
dF23 It determines the end of the defrost for unit having two circuit and common condensing ventilation
Operative mode:
0= Independent
1= The end defrost condition are satisfied In both circuits
2= At least one circuit has reached the end defrost condition
dF24 Start / stop defrost probe
Start / stop defrost from analog input
0= start and stop with condenser temperatur / pressure probe
1= start with evaporator pressure probe / stop with condenser temperatur / pressure probe
2= start with condenser temperatur / pressure probe / stop with evaporator pressure probe
3= start and stop with evaporator pressure probe

40.9 Defrost Dynamic Set Point


It is possible to modify the start defrost set point according to outside temperature.

Offset set point if dF37>0

Offset set point if dF37<0

Pag. 86 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

41. PRODUCTION OF SANITARY HOT WATER


The sanitary hot water production is enabled when the machine is switched on and disabled if the machine is
OFF or in STAND-BY.
The Ichill has to be configured for the proportional regulation (St11=0) and not in neutral zone.
In case of machine with valve 1 and valve 2 in gas circuit and cooling and sanitary water active at the same
time, the number of compressors to use is determined by CO78 parameter.
Two temperature probes need to be configured when the function is enabled:
 Probe 1: it is used to determine the temperature of the sanitary water
 Probe 2: it can be used to stop the sanitary water production for high temperature. As an alternative to
Probe 2 it is possible ti choose another probe setting FS48 parameter.
Configurable proportional band and set-point are used to regulate the production of sanitary water; when the
sanitary water function is enabled, you will see symbol lighted on the display.
The production of sanitary water can only be requested when the temperature detected by Probe n°1 is
below the FS03 set-point – band FS04; all the compressors are called into action when the function is
enabled.
The sanitary water set-point can be viewed and modified on the display by pressing the SET button.
It is possible to set a minimum temperature under which the sanitary water heaters are switched on (low
temperature protection).
It is possible to use a second sanitary water set point by time schedule (parameters ES19..ES33, internal
clock is necessary) or by digital input (opportunely configured).
Inside the time band or when the digital input is active, to the set point is applied an offset determined by
ES32 parameter and the new differential is ES33.

Compressors regulation:
- FS49=0 the compressors are switched on when sanitary temperature < FS03 (sanitary water
set point) – FS04 (proportional band); all the compressors are switched on with a delay of CO03
seconds each other
- FS49=1 the proportional band is divided by the number of compressors; at every step
(proportional band/number of compressors) a compressor will be switched on

 FS49=0 Example for machine with 3 compressors

Pag. 87 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

 FS49=1 Example for machine with 3 compressors

Sanitary water heaters:


Sanitary water is produced using mainly the compressors; the sanitary water heaters are only used to
produce sanitary water if one or more compressors are not available for regulation (due to an alarm of a
compressor, activation of the unloading function,..) or if the sanitary water set-point is not reached within a
configured timeframe (described in greater detail below).
The FS08 parameter allows you to determine if the sanitary water heaters can be used when a compressor
is not available.
When the sanitary heaters are activated, the regulation band is divided according to the number of
compressors and sanitary heaters available (see figure below).

Max time for reaching the sanitary water set-point


A counter determines the maximum time for reaching the sanitary water set-point as from the moment the
production of sanitary water is requested; once this time has elapsed (parameter FS09) there are 2 options:
 If FS07=0, enable all the compressors (if not already enabled)
 If FS07=1, enable all the compressors and all the heating elements

After all the available steps (compressors and heaters) have been enabled, they remain activated until the
sanitary water set-point has been reached. At which point the heating elements are switched off immediately,
while the compressors are switched off in order, with a CO03 delay between each one.

In the event of sanitary water probe 1 faulty (the sanitary water regulation probe), the sanitary water function
is stopped and disabled; the controller will regulate normally in chiller or heat pump mode.
In the event of sanitary water probe 2 faulty (not involved in the regulation), the alarm is signalled without
affecting heat regulation in any way; sanitary water will continue to be produced normally even if the display
probe is not working properly.
If there is an error with the heat regulation probe (for the chiller or heat pump) during production of sanitary
water, the machine will continue to operate but the regulation of the chiller or heat pump is disabled and
sanitary water continues to be produced.

Pag. 88 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

41.1 Anti-Legionella Function


The FS12 parameter allows you to enable the anti-legionella function.
 FS12=0 intervals between two anti-legionella cycles; the process will have to be repeated after the
FS13 time since the last anti-legionella production procedure was carried out. The counter continues to
operate, regardless of whether the machine is on or off or in standby; if the power is OFF, the value of the
counter is recorded and then continued when the machine is next started up.

 FS12=1 time-bands; Ichill with internal real time clock is required (you need to configure the day of
activation FS18 and the start time FS17).

 FS12=2 daily time band (start time FS17 is needed)

To disable the function is necessary to configure FS12=0 and FS13=0 or FS12=1 and FS18=0 or FS12=2
and FS17=0:00.

The function is enabled when the machine is ON. If the request for an anti-legionella cycle is made when the
machine is switched off, the cycle will start immediately when the machine is next switched on and the
priority is given to anti-legionella cycle.
If instead heat regulation is prioritized, the anti-legionella cycle will run when the chiller/heat pump set-point
is reached.
The function must remain active for the minimum time configured with parameter FS19 (activated when the
temperature of the sanitary water reaches the anti-legionella set-point) and can last a maximum of FS29
minutes.
If FS02=0 the Anti-legionella cycle starts when cooling/heating set point is reached.

Compressors and sanitary heaters in Anti-legionella cycle

FS46=0 Compressors and heaters used at the same time in Anti-legionella cycle
When the anti-legionella cycle is active, all the compressors and heating elements configured for the sanitary
water are switched on; once the set-point (FS14) is reached, the compressors are switched off (delayed of
CO04 time) while the heating elements are switched off when the the set-point (FS14) + band (FS20) is
reached.
The anti-legionella cycle is enabled for FS19 time; during this time the machine works to maintain the anti-
legionella set point.
The Anti-legionella cycle lasts maximum FS29 minutes.
It is possible to switch off the compressors if the sanitary water temperature reaches FS50 temperature.
At the end of this procedure, the controller returns to the production of sanitary water or normal
heating/cooling regulation.
If the FS02 parameter (operating priority) gives priority to heating/cooling regulation and the production of
anti-legionella needs to be enabled, then the heat regulation set-point has to be reached beforehand.
The anti-legionella cycle has to end before heating/cooling regulation can start, even if the FS02 parameter
gives the priority to heating/cooling regulation.

FS46=1 First compressors then heaters are used in Anti-legionella cycle


At first the compressors are switched on; when FS50 set point is reached, all the compressors are switched
off and sanitary heaters are switched on to reach the Anti-legionella set point (FS14) + band (FS20).
Once reached, the instrument works to maintain the set point for FS19 time; if water temperature falls down
below FS14 the heaters are switched on and if falls down below FS 50 compressors are switched on.
The Anti-legionella cycle lasts maximum FS29 minutes.

FS46=2 Only heaters are used in Anti-legionella cycle


Only sanitary heaters are used in the Anti-legionella cycle (compressors off); when FS14 + FS20
temperature is reached the heaters are switched off.
Once reached the set point, the instrument works to maintain the set point for FS19 time; the Anti-legionella
cycle lasts maximum FS29 minutes.

Pag. 89 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

FS46=3 Only compressors are used in Anti-legionella cycle


Only compressors are used in the Anti-legionella cycle (heaters off); when FS14 + FS20 temperature is
reached the compressors are switched off.
Once reached the set point, the instrument works to maintain the set point for FS19 time; the Anti-legionella
cycle lasts maximum FS29 minutes.

Priority management (sanitary water or heating/cooling)

If FS02 =0, priority is given to the production of chilled/hot water; sanitary hot water is produced once the
chiller/heat pump requests has been satisfied.
The production of anti-legionella is stopped in case of chiller/heat pump requests.

If FS02=1, priority is given to the production of sanitary water (or anti-legionella). Chilled water or hot water
can be produced once the need for sanitary hot water has been satisfied (if required).

If FS02=2, if the digital input configured as “Sanitary water priority” is active, the priority is given to the
production of sanitary water.

If defrosting is required, this takes priority over the production of sanitary water or anti-legionella even if
FS02=1.

41.2 Water Pumps Management


The sanitary water pump is managed in sanitary hot water regulation or during the anti-legionella cycle.

Evaporator water pump:


 if CO16=1 (evaporator water pump always on), also in sanitary water regulation the water pump is ON.
If the machine is forced to work only in sanitary water (digital input “only sanitary water” is active), the
evaporator water pump is:
o OFF if FS47=1
o ON if FS47=0

 if CO16=2 (evaporator water pump on if at least a compressor is on), the parameter FS47 allows to
choose if the water pup is on or off in case of sanitary hot water production. If the machine has the
sanitary valves placed in the gas circuit, in case of contemporary cooling and sanitary hot water
production, the evaporator water pump is on.

If only one water pump is needed for cooling, heating and sanitary water, the evaporator water pump has to
be configured.

The times for managing the sanitary water pump are as follows:
 The valve 1 and valve 2 are switched with the delay of FS27 seconds from start-up of the sanitary water
pump
 The sanitary water pump is switched off with the delay of FS28 seconds from switching valve 1 and valve 2

The sanitary water flow switch is operated according to the times of the evaporator flow switch (parameter
AL15, AL16, AL17 and AL18).

Sanitary water flow switch, solar panel flow switch and overload sanitary water pump.

It is possible to enable the sanitary water flow switch by setting appropriately parameters AL65..AL68.
It is possible to enable the solar panel flow switch by setting appropriately parameters AL69..AL72.

If sanitary water flow switch or sanitary water pump overload is active, sanitary water regulation is disabled;
heating and cooling regulation proceed normally.
If solar panel flow switch is active, solar panel regulation is disabled; heating and cooling regulation proceed
normally.

Pag. 90 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

41.3 Sanitary Water Second Set Point


The sanitary water second set point can enabled by time bands (ES19..ES33 parameters) or digital input
properly configured.
In case of sanitary water second set point enabled by time bands, the Ichill must have internal clock.

Par. ES25 – ES31 0= Function disabled


st
1= 1 period enabled
nd
2= 2 period enabled
3= 1st and 2nd periods enabled
rd
4= 3 period enabled
st rd
5= 1 and 3 periods enabled
6= 2 and 3rd periods enabled
nd

7= 1st, 2nd and 3rd periods enabled

Inside the time band or when the digital input is active to the sanitary water set point is applied an offset
(parameter ES32) and the new differential for the regulation is ES33.

41.4 Sanitary Hot Water Production: Valves In Water Circuit ___ Fs01=1 (Air/Water,
Water/Water Unit)

41.4.1 - Sanitary hot water operation when the unit is producing hot water
When sanitary hot water production is required (and it has priority), the sequence of operation is the
following:
 the sanitary water pump is switched on
 after a delay of FS27 seconds, sanitary valve 1 is swithed on
 after a delay of FS10 seconds the sanitary valve 2 is switched off
Sanitary hot water is produced until the FS03 set-point is reached.
Once the sanitary water set-point is reached, the sequence of operation is the following:
 sanitary valve 2 is switched on
 after a delay of FS10 seconds the sanitary water valve 1 is switched off
 after a delay of FS28 seconds the sanitary water circulation pump is switched off

Condenser fans are managed normally.

The defrost takes priority over the production of sanitary water.


If the controller determines the need for a defrosting cycle during the production of sanitary water, the Ichill
stops the sanitary hot water operation to activate the defrost procedure:
 all compressors and heaters are stopped
 the sanitary valve 2 is switched on
 after the FS10 delay sanitary water valve 1 is switched off
 after a delay of FS28 seconds the sanitary water pump is switched off

The defrost can now start as per the normal procedure.


At the end of the defrosting cycle:
 If there is a need to produce sanitary water, the compressors and any heating elements will be switched
on. After the FS11 delay from the end of the dripping phase, sanitary water valve 1 is switched on and,
after the FS10 delay, sanitary water valve 2 is switched off.
 If there is no need to produce sanitary water, the controller continues with normal heat regulation.

Pag. 91 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

41.4.2 - Sanitary hot water operation when the unit is producing cold water
When the production of sanitary water is required (and it has priority), it is necessary to reverse the cycle as
follows:
 the compressors are switched off
 after the dF07/2 delay the 4-way valve status is reversed
 after dF07/2 the compressors are switched on
 after a delay of FS27 seconds valve 1 is switched on
 after the FS10 delay the sanitary water valve 2 is switched off
The production of sanitary water stops once the set-point is reached and it will be possible to return to
produce cold water (if needed):
 the compressors are switched off
 the valve 2 is switched on
 after the FS10 delay the sanitary water valve 1 is switched off
 after a delay of FS28 seconds the sanitary water circulation pump is switched off
 after a delay of dF08/2 the 4-way valve status is reversed
 after a delay of dF08/2 the compressors are switched on as per normal if required by the chiller
regulator

41.5 Sanitary Hot Water Production: Valves In Gas Circuit ___ Fs01=2 (Air/Water,
Water/Water Unit)

41.5.1 Sanitary hot water operation when the unit is producing hot water
When sanitary hot water production is required (and it has priority), the sequence of operation is the
following:
 the sanitary water pump is switched on
 after a delay of FS27 seconds the valve 1 is activated
 after a delay of FS10 seconds the sanitary water valve 2 is switched off
Sanitary hot water is produced until the FS03 set-point is reached.

Once the sanitary water set-point is reached:


 sanitary water valve 2 is switched on
 after a delay of FS10 seconds the sanitary water valve 1 is switched off
 after a delay of FS28 seconds the sanitary water circulation pump is switched off
Condenser fans are managed normally.

The defrost takes priority over the production of sanitary water.


If the controller determines the need for a defrosting cycle during the production of sanitary water, the Ichill
stops the sanitary hot water operation to activate the defrost procedure:
 all compressors and heaters are stopped
 the valve 2 is activated
 after the FS10 delay the sanitary valve 1 is switched off
 after a delay of FS28 seconds the sanitary water pump is switched off
The defrost can now start as per the normal procedure.
At the end of the defrosting cycle:
 If there is a need to produce sanitary water, the compressors and any heating elements will be switched
on. After the FS11 delay from the end of the dripping phase, sanitary water valve 1 is enabled and, after
the FS10 delay, sanitary water valve 2 is switched off.
 If there is no need to produce sanitary water, the controller continues with normal heat regulation.

41.5.2 - Sanitary hot water operation when the unit is producing cold water
When the production of hot sanitary water is required, the sequence of operation is different and depend on
the status of the compressors:

a) One or more compressors are switched on for production of chilled water


If the production of sanitary hot water is required during operation in chiller mode:

Pag. 92 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

 the sanitary water circulation pump is switched on


 after a delay of FS27 seconds the sanitary water valve 1 is switched on
 after the FS10 delay the sanitary water valve 2 is switched off

The following two cases could occur during the production of sanitary hot water:
 The sanitary water set-point is reached when the chiller is working (the chiller set-point is not
reached):
 the sanitary water valve 2 is switched on
 after the FS10 delay the sanitary water valve 1 is switched off
 after a delay of FS28 seconds the sanitary water circulation pump is switched off
At the end of this phase, if necessary, the machine continues to regulate in chiller mode.
 The regulation temperature reaches the chiller set-point (parameter ST01) and the sanitary hot
water production is working:
 the sanitary water circulation pump stays on
 the sanitary water valve 2 is switched on
 after the FS10 delay the sanitary water valve 1 and the compressors are switched off
 after the DF07/2 delay the 4-way valve status is reversed
 after dF07/2 the compressors are switched on again to produce hot sanitary water
 after the FS11 delay from the 4-way valve switching, the sanitary water valve 1 is switched
on
 after the FS10 delay the sanitary water valve 2 is switched off
Once the sanitary water set-point is reached:
 the sanitary water valve 2 is switched on
 after the FS10 delay sanitary water valve 1 is switched off
 after FS28 seconds the sanitary water circulation pump and the compressors are
switched off
 after the dF08/2 delay the status of the 4-way valve is reversed

If the sanitary water production is working and the temperature detected by the chiller regulation
probe is greater than ST01+ST07 (cold water required), the sequence of operatiuon is the
following:
 the sanitary water pump will remain on
 the sanitary valve 2 is switched on
 after the FS10 delay the sanitary water valve 1 is switched off
 the compressors are switched off
 after the DF08/2 delay the 4-way valve status is reversed
 after a delay of dF08/2 the compressors are switched on to produce chilled water and
sanitary water
When the sanitary water set-point is reached:
 sanitary water valve 2 is switched on
 after the FS10 delay the sanitary water valve 1 is switched off
 after a delay of FS28 seconds the sanitary water circulation pump is switched off

b) None of the compressors are switched on for the production of chilled water
In this case, the cycle is reversed as follows:
 the 4-way valve status is reversed
 after dF07/2 the compressors are switched on
 the sanitary water pump switches on after the FS11 delay from start-up of the compressors
 after a delay of FS27 seconds the sanitary water valve 1 is switched on
 after the FS10 delay the sanitary water valve 2 is switched off.

Once the sanitary water set-point is reached, the sequence of operation is the following:
 the sanitary valve 2 is switched on
 after the FS10 delay the sanitary water valve 1 and the compressors are switched off
 after a delay of FS28 seconds the sanitary water circulation pump is switched off

Pag. 93 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

 after the DF07/2 delay the 4-way valve status is reversed and normal regulation is
restored.
If chilled water is required during the production of sanitary water, operation is the same as in the
previous case.

42. SOLAR PANEL MANAGEMENT

Though appropriate configuration of FS55 and FS56 parameters is possible to use the solar panel in heating
or for sanitary hot water production.
The solar panel is managed through the valve and water pump control; their status depend from:
 solar panel temperature
 regulation probe (typically heating regulation probe or sanitary water regulation probe); this probe is
defined in FS57 and FS58 parameters

42.1 Solar Panel In Sanitary Hot Water

 Compressors and solar panel in integration to sanitary water (FS55=1):


If:
solar panel temperature – sanitary temperature > FS59 (Dt to enable solar panel in sanitary water)
the solar panel are enabled to work; sanitary probe is defined by FS57 parameter (it is possible to set
another probe, if needed).
Compressors are normally managed by sanitary hot water temperature and sanitary water set point.

 if sanitary water temperature < FS23-FS24, the valve of the solar panel is open and the water pump is on
 if sanitary water temperature > FS23, , the valve of the solar panel is close and the water pump is off

 Solar panel in heating mode (FS55=2)

If:
solar panel temperature – sanitary temperature > FS59 (Dt to enable solar panel in sanitary water)
the solar panel are enabled to work; sanitary probe is defined by FS57 parameter (it is possible to set
another probe, if needed).
At first compressors are not used for sanitary hot water.
It is possible to set a maximum time to use solar panel (FS61); when this time is elapsed and sanitary set
point is not reached, the solar panel are disabled and compressors are switched on.
The sanitary water pump runs when solar panel are enabled.
In regulation, if
solar panel temperature – sanitary temperature < FS59
the solar panel are disabled and the hot sanitary water is done by compressors.

Dt control is done only at the time of the request of sanitary hot water; at this moment, if Dt< FS59 the solar
panel are not used and compressors are used for heating.

42.2 Solar Panel In Heating Mode

 Solar panel in integration mode (FS56=1)


If:
solar panel temperature – heating temperature > FS60 (Dt to enable solar panel in heating)

Pag. 94 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

the solar panel are enabled to work (valve is open and water pump on); heating probe is defined by FS58
parameter (it is possible to set another probe, if needed).
Compressors are normally managed by heating regulation.

 Solar panel in Heating (FS56=2)


If:
solar panel temperature – heating temperature > FS60 (Dt to enable solar panel in heating)
the solar panel are enabled to work; heating probe is defined by FS58 parameter (it is possible to set another
probe, if needed).
At first compressors are not used for heating.
It is possible to set a maximum time to use solar panel (FS61); when this time is elapsed and sanitary set
point is not reached, the solar panel are disabled and compressors are switched on.

In regulation, if
solar panel temperature – heating temperature < FS60
the solar panel are disabled and the heating is done by compressors.

Dt control is done only at the time of the request of heating; if Dt< FS60 the solar panel are not used and
compressors are used for heating.

43. UNIT WITH HYBRID EXCHANGERS (AIR / WATER UNIT)


The parameter CF95=1 enables this function.
This unit manages two exchangers by relay:
- Hybrid exchanger 1
- Hybrid exchanger 2

Summer operation mode:

Winter operation mode:

Pag. 95 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

44. GEOTHERMAL FREE COOLING


Outputs managed:
 relay for valve/pump management
 0..10V analog output to control a modulating valve

In heating the relay is OFF and the analog output is 0V.


Free cooling operation mode:

 CF97=2: Free cooling is the only cooling source


 CF97=3: Free cooling and compressors work together to produce cooling. The compressors work
according their standard regulation.

Free cooling management:


2 probes are needed, selected from those configured in the instrument (1 Pb1, 2=Pb2, etc.); parameters to
select the probes are FS41 and FS42.

 if T1 temperature – T2 temperature  FS21, the Free cooling is enabled and the relay and analog
output are manages as figures below
 if T1 temperature – T2 temperature < FS21 – FS22, the Free cooling is disabled

Analog output management:

Digital output management:

Pag. 96 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Parameter Description min max udm


FS21 0 25.0 °C
Temperature differential to enable the freecooling function 45 °F
FS22 0.1 25.0 °C
Temperature differential for the free cooling regulation 0 45 °F
….
FS34 Free cooling water pump OFF time if chiller only Free cooling 0 250 min
FS35 Free cooling water pump ON time if chiller only Free cooling 0 250 sec
FS36 Free cooling maximum time 0 250 min
FS37 Set point Free cooling -50.0 70.0 °C
-58 158 °F
0.0 50.0 bar
0 725 psi
FS38 Proportional band Free coling 0.1 25.0 °C
0 45 °F
0.1 14.0 Bar
1 203 Psi
FS39 Minimum value Free cooling analog output 0 100 %
FS40 Maximum value Free cooling analog output 0 100 %
FS41 T1 probe selection for Free cooling 0 10
0=disabled, 1=Pb1, 2=Pb2, etc.
FS42 T2 probe selection for Free cooling 0 10
0=disabled, 1=Pb1, 2=Pb2, etc.
FS43 Outside temperature set point to force the maximum speed of 0 1
condenser fan

 Only free cooling for cooling (CF97=2)

Compressors are not used for cooling.


Evaporator and condenser water pumps are managed according to chiller probe and St01 set point;
free cooling valve/pump is managed according chiller probe and FS37 set point (or St01 if
St01<FS37).
If the free cooling set point is not reached in FS36 minutes (0 = function disabled) or when the free
cooling set point is reached, the free cooling will be disabled for FS34 minutes.
After this time the valve/pump is switched on for FS35 seconds and, when this time is elapsed the
controller verify if T1 temperature – T2 temperature  FS21 and if free cooling temperature > FS37.
If both condition are true, the free cooling valve/pump is activated.
If FS34=0 and FS35=0 this function is disabled.

 Compressors and free cooling used for cooling (CF97=2)


Compressors are managed as standard chiller regulation.
Free cooling valve/pump is managed according chiller probe and FS37 set point (FS37 has to be set
>St01); the regulation is done like figure above.

Pag. 97 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Low temperature protection

If the temperature detected by probe selected with FS62 parameter is lower than FS63 set point, the free
cooling is disabled.
The free cooling will be enabled when temperature detected by probe selected with FS62 parameter is
higher than FS63 + FS64.

44.1 FAN SPEED CONTROL IF COMPRESSORS AND FREE COOLING ARE USED
FOR COOLING (CF97=3)
When the free cooling is not active the condenser fan speed is managed like standard regulation.
If free cooling is active:
 outside temperature > FS43 + FS44: condenser fan speed is forced at maximum speed
 outside temperature < FS43: when outside temperature decreases below FS43 temperature, after
FS45 minutes the condenser fan speed is managed as standard regulation

45. RECOVERY FUNCTION


The recovery function is Enabled if:

1 Par. rC01 not equal to 0.


2 Chiller running mode.
3 The condensing temperature / pressure is lower than set rC06 –rC07 (differential).
4 The input/output resources are configured
5 The remote recovery digital input is activated.

The recovery function is NOT Enabled if:

1 Par. rC01 = 0.
2 Heat pump running mode, remote OFF or stand by.
3 The condensing temperature / pressure is higher than set rC06.
4 The input/output resources are not properly configured (alarm ACF9).
5 The remote recovery digital input is not activated.

NECESSARY RESOURCE FOR THE RECOVERY OF THE CIRCUIT #1

Output relay configured as valve for recovery circuit #1.


Remote recovery digital input for circuit #1.
Condenser probe of the circuit #1.

NECESSARY RESOURCE FOR THE RECOVERY OF THE CIRCUIT #2

Output relay configured as valve for recovery circuit #2.


Remote recovery digital input for circuit #2
Condenser probe of the circuit #2.

45.1 UNIT WITH TWO SEPARATE IDRAULIC CIRCUITS

FUNCTIONING

Par. rC01 = 1 unit with two separate circuits:

CIRCUIT # 1

Pag. 98 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

With the recovery function enabled, the unit running in chiller and with the temperature/pressure proper
condition, the unit can start the recovery of the first circuit if the corresponding digital input is active. When
the digital input is active the relay of the valve for the recovery of the first circuit is activated.

CIRCUIT # 2
With the recovery function enabled, the unit running in chiller and with the temperature/pressure proper
condition, the unit can start the recovery of the second circuit if the corresponding digital input is active.
When the digital input is active the relay of the valve for the recovery of the second circuit is activated.

After starting the function, if the digital input becomes not active the recovery function runs for the time set in
rC04 before stopping.

Between the end and the next recovery function the instrument waits the time set in the parameter rC05
even if the digital input is activated again.

RECOVERY START AND STOP OF THE TWO CIRCUITS CONFIGURED WITH CAPACITY STEPS
During the start and the stop of the function the time delay rC02 and rC03 are not counted and the valve is
immediately turned on or off.

RECOVERY START OF THE TWO CIRCUITS CONFIGURED WITH MORE THAN ONE CAPACITY STEP
Circuits 1 and 2 configured with more than one step of power (eg each circuit with three compressors), if the
thermoregulation requires to turn on one or more resources and the recovery is activated from the digital
input the unit turns on only one step and then waits the rC02 delay (this delay keep off all the other steps
after the recovery is started). After the delay the recovery valve is turned on and, after the rC03 time (this
delay keeps off all the other steps after the recovery is started), the other resources if necessary are turned
on.

RECOVERY STOP OF THE TWO CIRCUITS CONFIGURED WITH MORE THAN ONE CAPACITY STEP
Circuits 1 and 2 configured with more than one step of power (Eg. each circuit with three compressors). After
the rC04 time delay (minimum on time of the recovery function when activated) if the digital input of the
recovery is not active the units stops the new resources for the time set in rC02. After this delay the recovery
valve is turned off and the regulation restarts with its normal running condition.

RECOVERY START OF THE TWO CIRCUITS WITH ALL THE CAPACITY STEPS ACTIVATED
When the system is running with 100% (eg all the three compressor of a circuit are on) of power and the
digital input start the recovery function: before turning on the recovery valve one of the step (depending on
the time running hours), is turned off for the time set in rC02. After rC02 the recovery valve is turned on.
Then, after the rC03 time (this delay keeps off all the other steps after the recovery is started) the resource
forced off if necessary is turned on again.

RECOVERY STOP OF THE TWO CIRCUITS WITH ALL THE CAPACITY STEPS ACTIVATED
When the system is running with 100% (eg all the three compressor of a circuit are on) of power and the
digital input stop the recovery function: after the rC04 time delay (minimum on time of the recovery function
when activated) and before turning off the recovery valve, one of the step is turned off for the time set in
rC02. When the delay is expired the unit turns off the recovery valve and and the regulation restarts with its
normal running condition.

ATTENTION:
For both the circuits: when the compressor are off because of the thermoregulation and the digital input of
the recovery function is active, the recovery valve is disabled.

45.2 UNIT WITH TWO IDRAULIC CIRCUIT WORKING IN PARALLEL

FUNCTIONING
Par. rC01 = 2 unit with two circuits working in parallel:
The recovery function from the digital inputs is divided in two steps:

UNIT WITH ONE CIRCUIT RUNNING


If the recovery function is enabled and if the condenser temperature/pressure condition are within the limits
that circuit starts the recovery when one of the digital inputs is activated. With active digital input the recovery
valve of the circuit is on.

Pag. 99 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

UNIT WITH BOTH THE CIRCUITS RUNNING


If recovery function is enabled, if the condenser temperature/pressure condition are within the limits the
circuit #1 starts the recovery (recovery valve #1 on) when the digital input #1 is activated and the circuit #2
starts the recovery (recovery valve #2 on) when the digital input #2 is activated.

After starting, the recovery function will run at least for the time set in parameter rC04 (minimum time with
recovery on).
Between the end of a recovery cycle and the next start the unit waits the time set in Par. rC05 before starting
it again.

RECOVERY START–STOP OF THE CIRCUITS 1 AND 2 CONFIGURED WITH ONE STEP EACH
Both for recovery start or stop, the delay time rC02 and rC03 are not counted and the recovery valve is
immediately turned on or off.

RECOVERY START OF THE TWO CIRCUITS CONFIGURED WITH MORE THAN ONE CAPACITY STEP
Circuits 1 and 2 configured with more than one step of power (eg each circuit with three compressors), if the
thermoregulation requires to turn on one or more resources and the recovery is activated from the digital
input the unit turns on only one step and then waits the rC02 delay (this delay keep off all the other steps
after the recovery is started). After the delay the recovery valve is turned on and, after the rC03 time (this
delay keeps off all the other steps after the recovery is started), the other resources if necessary are turned
on.

RECOVERY STOP OF THE TWO CIRCUITS CONFIGURED WITH MORE THAN ONE CAPACITY STEP
Circuits 1 and 2 configured with more than one step of power (Eg. each circuit with three compressors). After
the rC04 time delay (minimum on time of the recovery function when activated) if the digital input of the
recovery is not active the units stops the new resources for the time set in rC02. After this delay the recovery
valve is turned off and the regulation restarts with its normal running condition.

RECOVERY START OF THE TWO CIRCUITS WITH ALL THE CAPACITY STEPS ACTIVATED
When the system is running with 100% (Eg. all the three compressor of a circuit are on) of power and the
digital input start the recovery function: before turning on the recovery valve one of the step (depending on
the time running hours), is turned off for the time set in rC02. After rC02 the recovery valve is turned on.
Then, after the rC03 time (this delay keeps off all the other steps after the recovery is started) the resource
forced off if necessary is turned on again.

RECOVERY STOP OF THE TWO CIRCUITS WITH ALL THE CAPACITY STEPS ACTIVATED
When the system is running with 100% (Eg. all the three compressor of a circuit are on) of power and the
digital input stop the recovery function: after the rC04 time delay (minimum on time of the recovery function
when activated) and before turning off the recovery valve, one of the step is turned off for the time set in
rC02. When the delay is expired the unit turns off the recovery valve and and the regulation restarts with its
normal running condition.

ATTENTION:
For both the circuits: when the compressor are off because of the thermoregulation and the digital input of
the recovery function is active, the recovery valve is disabled.

46. CONDENSER TEMPERAURE / PRESURE CONDITION TO


ENABLE/DISABLE THE RECOVERY CYCLE
The recovery can be disabled depending on the condenser condition to avoid a possible high pressure
alarm. The function can be executed by programming the analogue input as condenser transducer 1 or 2
(Par CF07=0 temperature control or CF07= 1 pressure control).
FUNCTIONING
46.1 RECOVERY DISABLED
With the recovery function is activated: if the temperature/pressure is equal or higher than the set rC06 (limit
of the recovery cycle) the recovery cycle, of the circuit detected by transducer, is disabled. When the
recovery is disabled the bottom display shows the following blinking icons: b1rC = for circuit 1, b2rC = for
circuit 2.

Pag. 100 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

46.2 RECOVERY ENABLED


If the temperature/pressure decreases under the set rC06-rC07 (differential) the recovery cycle, of the circuit detected by that
transducer , is enabled again.
46.3 NOTE ABOUT RECOVERY ENABLED/DISABLED
To avoid long period of time with recovery function disabled and the temperature/pressure within the range rC06-rC07, the units starts
counting the delay set in rC08. After this delay if the decreasing temperature is still within the rC06-rC07 range, the recovery cycle is
forced on again.

47. OPERATION RELATED TO THE REAL TIME CLOCK

47.1 Real Time Clock Disabled By Digital Input


When the digital input configured as “Operation working mode: by RTC or keyboard” is active, the real time
clock is disabled and all the function involved with the real time clock are disabled.

47.2 “Only supply fan” working mode”


This function can be enabled only if the Ichill is provided with internal clock.
If one of the digital input is configured as “Operation mode with supplay fan only” and it is activated, the Ichill
enables only the supply fan (other loads are disabled); the supplay fan works according to the time table
programming (parameters ES01..ES13).

ATTENTION:
When the supply fan is on and the Ichill is forced in STD-BY or remote OFF (by digital input), the supply fan
will be switched off with a CO18 delay.

48. MESSAGES - ALARM CODES


The alarm codes are defined by an alphanumeric code.
Alarm typology:
 A = alarm of the unit
 b = alarm of the circuit
 C = alarm of the compressor

48.1 Automatic / Manual Alarm Description

The menù ALARM allows to read the alarms.


An alarm can be:
 automatic reset: the reset is automatic when the cause of the alarm is not present
 manual reset: to reset the alarm see Cap. 39.2

Alarms managed by number of events per hour


Some alarms are managed by number of events per hour; when the alarm happens more times per hour the
alarm become a manual reset.
Following an example of low pressure alarm:
o AL05=0 the alarm is always manual reset
o 0<AL05<16:
o the alarm is automatic if the number of the event is < AL05
o the alarm is manual if the number of the event is = AL05
o AL05=16 the alarm is always automatic reset

Compressor overload alarm is always manual reset:

Pag. 101 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

- when the number of the event is < AL20 to reset the alarm follow the procedure described in Cap.
39.2
- when the number of the event is = AL20 to reset the alarm follow the procedure described in Cap.
39.3 (a password is necessary to reset the alarm)

If the cause of alarm is already present, the display shows “Active” and it is not possible to reset the alarm.
If the cause of alarm is not present, the display shows “Reset” and it is possible to reset the alarm.

AP1 - AP2 - AP3 - AP4 - AP5 - AP6 - AP7 - AP8 - AP9 - AP10 PROBE FAILURE
Label on alarm AP1 = PB1 probe alarm…AP10 = PB10 regulator probe alarm
visualization menu
Reason Probe configured but the read-out is not in the range
Reset Probe not configured or probe in the right range
Restart Automatic
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on
Loads The behaviour of the load depend on witch probe is on error (regulation probe
= all loads OFF; external temperature probe = only loads involved on this
probe)

AEFL: evaporator flow alarm (differential pressure switch)


Label on alarm AEFL evaporator flow alarm
visualization menu
Origin Digital input active for the time set in AL15 after the water pump is on and, after
the digital input itself is activated, for the time set in AL17.
Reset Digital input not active for the time AL18.
Restart Automatic – Manual if the digital input is active for AL16 seconds (Reset
procedure in Menu function).
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on only during normal running conditions.

ATTENTION
The alarm relay and the buzzer are activated only if the alarm appears during normal running conditions.
When the temperature setpoint has been reached and CO16/CO21= 2, the icon blinks without alarm.
NOTE ABOUT THE FLOW ALARM
CO16 / CO21=0 Water pump not enabled.
The alarm is managed only if one digital input is configured as flow switch, the restart is always automatic.
CO16 / CO21=1 Water pump with continuous control.
The alarm is managed only if one digital input is configured as flow switch, the restart is always automatic,
in stand–by or remote OFF ( pump off), it becomes manual after AL16 time.
In chiller or heat pump only. During the functioning of the unit any flow alarm stop the loads described in
the table, the water pump follow its regulation algorithm and is turned off, after AL16 time.
CO16 / CO21=2 Compressor on – pump on
The alarm is managed only if one digital input is configured as flow switch, the restart is always automatic,
in stand–by or remote OFF ( pump off), it becomes manual after AL16 time.
During the functioning of the unit any flow alarm stop the loads described in the table, the water pump follow
its regulation algorithm and is turned off, after AL16 time it is completely locked.
MANUAL RESTART OF THE FLOW ALARM
After AL16 time it is necessary to enter the function Menu to reset the alarm itself. The alarm message
DOES NOT DISAPPEAR if the alarm condition is still on. The water pump, if configured, can start and the
alarm is by-passed for AL18 seconds.
AL15 Alarm flow delay after on pump.
When the water pump starts the AL15 delay stops any flow alarm to reach the normal flow condition.
AL16 Maximum time flow switch alarm active befor to block the water pump
It determines maximum time of flow alarm active before to block the water pump.

Pag. 102 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

ATTENTION
With air/water or water/water units and CF01=1,2 the minimum number of events per hour is 1.
AL17 Active flow input duration
Within this time the flow alarm must be active and after AL17 is expired the alarm is signalled. The counter
starts after AL15 and allows to filter the improvise flow reduction or the possible bubbles of air.
AL18 Not active flow input duration
Within this time the flow alarm must be not active and, after this time, the previous alarm is automatically
reset (if automatic) or, if manual, the unit can be restarted.

ACFL: condenser flow alarm (differential Pressure switch)


Label on alarm ACFL condenser flow alarm
visualization menu
Origin Digital input active for the time set in AL55 after the water pump is on and, after
the digital input itself is activated, for the time set in AL57.
Alarm not enable if AL14=0
Alarm enabled in chiller only if AL14=1
Alarm enabled in heat pump only if AL14=2
Alarm enabled in chiller and heat pump if AL14=3
Reset Digital input not active for the time AL58.
Restart Automatic – Manual after AL56 (Reset procedure in Menu function).
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on only during normal running conditions.
Loads OFF

APFL: solar panel flow alarm


Label on alarm APFL solar panel flow alarm
visualization menu
Origin The flow switch alarm is not detecded for AL69 seconds starting from water
pump activation.
Flow switch alarm is signalled if the digital input is active for AL71 seconds.
Reset Automatic reset: digital input not active for AL72 seconds.
Manual reset: Reset procedure in Menu function
Type of alarm Automatic if flow switch digital input activation < AL70 + AL71
Manual if Automatic if flow switch digital input activation > AL70 + AL71
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on only during normal running conditions.
Loads Solar panel water pump OFF

AHFL: sanitary water flow alarm


Label on alarm AHFL sanitary water flow alarm
visualization menu
Origin The flow switch alarm is not detecded for AL65 seconds starting from water
pump activation.
Flow switch alarm is signalled if the digital input is active for AL67 seconds.
Reset Automatic reset: digital input not active for AL68 seconds.
Manual reset: Reset procedure in Menu function
Type of alarm Automatic if flow switch digital input activation < AL66 + AL67
Manual if Automatic if flow switch digital input activation > AL66 + AL67
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on only during normal running conditions.
Loads Sanitary water pump OFF

AtSF: Overload alarm of the supply fan

Pag. 103 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Label on alarm AtSF: Overload alarm of the supply fan


visualization menu
Origin CF01=0: After on fan when the ID is activated for AL15 time. After on pump
when the ID is activated for AL17.
Reset Digital input not active for AL18 time
Restart Automatic – Manual if the digital input is active for AL16 seconds (Reset
procedure in Menu function).
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Loads OFF

MANUAL RESET OF THE OVERLOAD ALARM OF THE SUPPLY FAN


If the digital input is active for AL16 seconds it is necessary to restart manually the unit (reset procedure in
larm Menu with blinking label Reset if the alarm is not active from Al18 otherwise label Active (can not be
reset)). Push SET key to reset the alarm, the label disappears, the fan restarts and the alarm is by-passed
for AL15 time delay to allow the start-up if within this interval the alarm does not appear again.

AtE1 - AtE2 Evaporator pump overload alarm


Label on alarm AtE1 (overload pump alarm of evaporator 1)
visualization menu AtE2 (overload pump alarm of support evaporator 2)
Origin Active ID when it is configured as overload pump of evaporator 1
Active ID when it is configured as overload pump of support evaporator 2.
Reset With active digital input
Restart Manual (reset procedure in function menu).
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Loads Evaporator water pump and compressors OFF

AtC1 - AtC2 Condenser/recovery pump overload alarm


Label on alarm AtC1 (overload pump alarm of condenser 1)
visualization menu AtC2 (overload pump alarm of support condenser 2)
Origin Active ID when it is configured as overload pump of condenser 1
Active ID when it is configured as overload pump of condenser 2.
Reset With active digital input
Restart Manual (reset procedure in function menu).
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Loads Condenser water pump and compressors OFF

AtAS Sanitary water pump overload alarm


Label on alarm AtAS (sanitary water pump overload)
visualization menu
Origin Digital input active
Reset Digital input not active
Restart Automatic reset if number of alarms per hour < AL75.
Manual reset if number of alarms per hour = AL75 (reset procedure in function
menu).
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Loads Sanitary water pump OFF

Pag. 104 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

AtHS Sanitary heaters overload alarm


Label on alarm AtHS (sanitary heaters overload)
visualization menu
Origin Digital input active
Reset Digital input not active
Restart Manual (reset procedure in function menu)
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Loads Sanitay heaters OFF

Phase sequence alarm

Label on alarm ALSF


visualization menu
Origin Digital input active
Reset Digital input not active
Restart Automatic
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Loads OFF

AEE Eeprom alarm


Label on alarm AEE
visualization menu
Origin Wrong eeprom data
Reset -------
Restart Manual
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Loads OFF

AFr: Power supply frequency alarm


Label on alarm AFr (Line frequency alarm)
visualization menu
Origin The power supply frequency is not equal to the Par. CF83
Reset Ferquency control parameter adjusted, disabled CF83 = 2, frequency within
the tolerance
Restart Automatic
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Loads OFF

ALC1: Generic alarm with stop regulation


Label on alarm ALC1: generic alarm from digital input with stop regulation
visualization menu
Origin Digital input configured as generic alarm with stop regulation active after the
delay in Par. AL43

Pag. 105 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Reset Digital input configured as generic alarm with stop regulation not active after
the delay in Par. AL44
Restart Automatic – It becomes manual after AL42 events/hour
Logged only if manuale
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
REGULATION
Alarm Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Other loads OFF

ATTENTION
If during AL44 the alarm stop and start again the AL44 time delay is reloaded.

ALC2: Generic Signal alarm


Label on alarm ALC1: generic signal alarm from digital input if AL50 = 0
visualization menu
Origin Digital input configured as generic alarm with stop regulation active after the
delay in Par. AL52
Reset Digital input configured as generic alarm with stop regulation not active after
the delay in Par. AL53
Restart Automatic
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
REGULATION
Alarm Alarm relay + buzzer ON

ATTENTION
If during AL53 the alarm stop and start again the AL44 time delay is reloaded.

ALC2: Generic alarm with stop regulation


Label on alarm ALC1: generic signal alarm from digital input with stop regulation if AL50 = 1
visualization menu
Origin Digital input configured as generic alarm with stop regulation active after the
delay in Par. AL52
Reset Digital input configured as generic alarm with stop regulation not active after
the delay in Par. AL53
Restart Automatic – It becomes manual after AL51 events/hour
Logged only if manuale
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
REGULATION
Alarm Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Other loads OFF

ATTENTION
If during AL53 the alarm stop and start again the AL44 time delay is reloaded.

ACF1 - ACF2 - ACF3 - ACF4 - ACF5 - ACF6 - ACF7 - ACF8 - ACF9

Pag. 106 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Label on alarm ACF1


visualization menu  Heat pump unit without 4-way valve not configured
 Wrong configuration of defrost parameters dF22 and dF23)
ACF2
 Condensing control without probe configuration.
(one probe per circuit with 2 separate circuits, at least 1 probe for common
cond.)
 Fan proportional control algorithm not respected:
FA09 + FA11 + FA12 < FA10
FA12 < FA13
FA07 < FA15 < FA08
 Fan proportional control algorithm not respected and pump enabled:
FA18 + FA21 + FA20 < FA19
FA21 < FA22
FA16 < FA23 < FA17
 Fan ON - OFF regulation algorithm not respected:
FA09 < FA10
 Fan ON - OFF regulation algorithm not respected and pump enabled:
FA18 < FA19
 With pump and defrost enabled there are no evaporating/condensing
probes.
 With triac regulation (CF68, CF69 = 2) the power supply configuration is
Vcc (CF83 = 0)
ACF3
 Two digital / analogue inputs configured with the same function or without
the necessary resources (es. compressor 3 overload but compressor 3
relay not configured)
ACF4
 CF79 = 1 and none digital input configured as Chiller request or Heat
Pump request
 CF79 = 2 and none probe configured as external temperature probe
 Unit configured as Heat pump and rack compressorr unit enabled (Cr01≠0)
 CF03 = 1 and wrong configuration of the digital input or digital output for
condensing unit unit
ACF5
Circuito # 2 not configured but at least one of its resources are present (relay:
solenoid pump-down, heaters, inversion valve, fan condensing ON - OFF,
recovery, auxilairy)

Pag. 107 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

ACF6
 The total number of compressor of the 2 circuits ( CF04 + CF05 ) is:
 >6
 > 4 with no direct compressor start-up (CO10 ≠ 0) or the number of steps
is ≠ 0 (CF06),
 > 2 and the intermittent valve is configurated with ON (CO08) and OFF
(CO09 ) ≠ 0
 Pump-down function but at least in one circuit
 The pump-down solenoid relay is not present
 No pump-down pressure switch or evaporating probe when
 the pump-down is enabled with unit in start
Or
 No low pressure switch configurated.
 The compressor configuration with CF04 and CF05 but not the relay
outputs:
 Main
 Intermittent valve when enabled with the ON / OFF time, CO08 / CO09
≠ 0
 When the by-pass time ≠ 0 and there is no partialization or by-pass
valve configured
 Motor part_2 / centre of the star with part-winding or star-delta
 The necessary step valve configurated
 One relay is configured
 Too much compressors
 Intermittent valve when ON / OFF time CO08 / CO09 ≠ 0
 By-pass gas when the by-pass = 0
 Compressor Motor coil 2 / center of the star with direct compressor
start-up
 Wrong configuration of the capacity step valve
ACF7
Evaporator pump
√ Enabled (CO16 ≠ 0) but the relay is not configured
√ Not enabled (CO16 = 0) but the relay is configured
Condenser pump
√ Enabled (CO21 ≠ 0) but the relay is not configured
√ Not enabled (CO21 = 0) but the relay is configured
Allarm configuration water pump in antifizee alarm
 if Ar24=1 and Ar25=0
or
 ifAr25=1 and not probe configurated like NTC
 if Ar29=1 and Ar30=0
or
 Ar29=1 and wrong confìguration of the probes
ACF8
 Thermoregulation probe
 The thermoregulation probe (in chiller with ST09, in heat pump when
enabled with ST10) is not properly configurated (it does not exist or it is
not a NTC)
 Compressor rack is configurated with termoregulation like pressure
probe and not exist a pressure probe

Pag. 108 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Label on alarm ACF9


visualization menu Not Used
AC10
Compressor inverter controlled
 2 anologue output configurated for the same compressor
 One analog output is configured as output for compressor inverter
controlled but none relays is configured as compressor
 Parameter CF03=1 and one analog output configured as compressor
inverter controlled
AC11
Compressor with different power capacity enabled and:
 One analog output is configured as output for compressor inverter
controlled
 one of the compressor has capacity power = 0
 the regulation is not a neutral zone
AC12
Free cooling function enabled and:
 None relay is configured as free cooling valve
 None probe is configured as evaporator inlet probe and free cooling
probe
 wrong configuration of the following parameters: FS21 < FS22
AC13
Sanitary hot water function enabled and:
 None relay is configured as valve 1, valve 2 or sanitary water pump
 None probe is configured as probe 1 and probe 2 for sanitary hot water
production
Origin Wrong programming
Reset Correctly programming
Restart Automatic
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON

ArtF Clock failure

Label on alarm ArtF (clock failure)


visualization menu
Origin Clock chip failure
Reset Change clock chipset
Restart Manual in function menu
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Regulation
Loads Not changed
Energy saving Disabled if based on RTC
Unit ON/OFF Disabled if based on RTC

ArtC Clock alarm

Label on alarm ArtC (clock alarm)


visualization menu
Origin Wrong setting
Reset Clock adjusted

Pag. 109 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Restart Manual in function menu


Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Regulation
Loads Not changed
Energy saving Disabled if based on RTC
Unit ON/OFF Disabled if based on RTC

AEun: Unloading from high temperature of the evaporator water inlet


Label on alarm AEUn Unload signalling from evaporator
visualization menu
Origin During normal running condition when the temperature/pressure of evaporator
water inlet is higher than CO40 setpoint for the CO42 time delay.
Reset  If the water temperature is lower than CO39 –CO41 (differential)
 With unloading ON after the CO43 time delay.
Restart Automatic
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer OFF

AEht: alarm from high temperature of the evaporator water inlet


Label on alarm AEht High water temperature evaporator inlet
visualization menu
Origin During normal running condition when the temperature/pressure of evaporator
water inlet is higher than AL61 setpoint for the AL60 time delay.
Reset  If the water temperature is lower than AL61 – AL62 (differential)
 With unit in stand by or remote OFF if alarm reset is automatic
Restart Reset procedure in Menu function
Always manual AL59 = 0
Always automatic AL59 =16
From manual to utomatic if AL59 value is between 1 and 15
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
REGULATIONS
Compressor OFF
Other Loads Not modified

Pag. 110 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

ALti: low air ambient temperature (Air / Air unit only)


Label on alarm ALti (low temperature value of the evaporator air inlet)
visualization menu
Origin Chiller mode: CF01=0 and evaporator inlet NTC probe lower than AL26 for
AL28 seconds.
Heat pump: CF01=0 and evaporator inlet NTC probe lower than lower than
AL33 forAL36 seconds
In stand-by or remote OFF: the evaporator inlet NTC probe lower than the
lowest value compared between AL28 and AL36.
Reset Chiller: evaporator inlet NTC probe higher than AL26 + AL27(differential).
Heat pump: evaporator inlet NTC probe higher than AL33 + AL34 (differential).
n stand-by or remote OFF: the evaporator inlet NTC probe higher than
AL26+AL27 or AL33+AL34.
Restart Automatic
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on

AEP1 - AEP2 Evaporator pumps / Supply fan maintenance request


Label on alarm AEP1 (Main water pump)
visualization menu AEP2 (Support water pump)
Activation Load running hours > counter setpoint for that load
Reset Running hour reset (Hour label in Menu function)
Restart Manual
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Actions Alarm relay and buzzer activated
REGULATIONS
Actions Only signalling
Loads Not modified

The parameters CO34 / CO35 define the hour set counters for the condenser water pump / Support water
pump.
They establish the load running hours limit of the pump/s or the supply fan to give a maintenance signalling.
If one of these parameters is equal to 0 the maintenance signalling of that load is disabled but the running
hours counter remains active.

ACP1 - ACP12 Condenser pumps maintenance request


Label on alarm ACP1 (main water pump)
visualization menu ACP2 (support water pump)
Activation Load running hours > counter setpoint for that load
Reset Running hour reset (Hour label in Menu function)
Restart Manual
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Actions Alarm relay and buzzer activated
REGULATION
Actions Only signalling
Loads Not modified

B1HP - B2HP High Pressure switch circuit 1 and 2


Label on alarm b1HP (high pressure switch circuit #1)
visualization menu b2HP (high pressure switch circuit #2)
Reason The unit is running and the digital input of the high pressure switch is active
Reset Digital input not active

Pag. 111 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Restart Reset procedure in Menu function


Always manual AL54 = 0
Always automatic AL54 =16
From manual to utomatic if AL54 value is between 1 and 15
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on
Regulation
Condensing fan If FA02=0 the fan is forced at maximum speed for 60 seconds then switched
off
If FA02=1 the fan is forced at maximum speed for 60 seconds then regulate
according to normal fan regulation

b1lp - b2lp Low temperature / Low Condensing pressure of the Circuit


Label on alarm b1lP (low pressure digital input of the circuit 1)
visualization menu b2lP (low pressure digital input of the circuit 2)
Origin When the condensing probe value is lower than AL03 setpoint if:
 In chiller or heat pump
 Stand-by o remote OFF when AL08 = 1
 In defrost when AL06=1
The alarm is not signalled if:
 In defrost ,for the time AL07, when the 4-way valve is turned on.
 For the time set in AL01 after turning on the compressor.
Reset When the condensing probe temperature is higher than AL03 + AL04
(differential)
Restart Automatic– Manual after AL05 events per hour (Reset procedure in Menu
function).
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on

b1AC - b2AC - b1Ac - b2Ac Antifreeze alarm / Low outlet temperature (Air / Air unit in Chiller
mode)
Label on alarm b1AC (anti-freeze alarm of the circuit #1 in chiller)
visualization menu b2AC (anti-freeze alarm of the circuit #2 in chiller)
b1Ac (anti-freeze alarm signalling of the circuit #1 in chiller)
b2Ac (anti-freeze alarm signalling of the circuit #2 in chiller)
Both the labels are displayed when the alarm is coming from the evaporator
inlet probe or evaporator common outlet probe or when there is only one digital
input configured.
Origin Normal conditions, stand-by, remote OFF: when the anti-freeze probe value is
lower than AL26 for AL28 seconds.
With the anti-freeze digital input is active.
Reset When the anti-freeze probe value is higher than A26+ AL27(differential)
With the anti-freeze digital input is active.
Restart Automatic – Manual after AL29 events per hours (Reset procedure in Menu
function).
If AL74=1 to reset the alarm is necessary to type the password
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action If AL30=0 only the compressors are turned off and than display shows b1Ac
b2Ac, the buzzer and the alarm relay are not activated.
If AL30=0 only the compressors are turned off and than display shows b1Ac
b2Ac, the buzzer and the alarm relay are activated.
If the alarm comes from the digital input also the anti-freeze heaters are turned
on.

Pag. 112 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

b1AH - b2AH Anti-freeze alarm / Low outlet air temperaure(Air/Air unit only) on heat pump
mode
Label on alarm b1AH (anti-freeze alarm of the circuit #1 in heat pump)
visualization menu b2AH (anti-freeze alarm of the circuit #2 in heat pump)
b1Ah (anti-freeze alarm signalling of the circuit #1 in heat pump)
b2Ah (anti-freeze alarm signalling of the circuit #2 in heat pump)
Both the labels are displayed when the alarm is coming from the evaporator
inlet probe or evaporator common outlet probe or when there is only one digital
input configured.
Origin Normal conditions, stand-by, remote OFF: when the anti-freeze probe value is
lower than AL33 for AL36 seconds.
With the anti-freeze digital input is active.
Reset When the anti-freeze probe value is higher than AL33 + AL34.
With digital input ont active
Restart Automatic – Manual after AL37 events per hour (Reset procedure in Menu
function).
If AL74=1 to reset the alarm is necessary to type the password
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action If AL38=0 only the compressors are turned off and than display shows b1Ah -
b2Ah, the buzzer and the alarm relay are not activated.
If AL38=0 only the compressors are turned off and than display shows b1AH -
b2AH, the buzzer and the alarm relay are activated.
If the alarm comes from the digital input also the anti-freeze heaters are turned
on.

Attention
Par. AL35 anti-freeze alarm delay (low outlet air temperature air/air unit) when the unit starts in heat pump
mode.
In stand-by or remote OFF: there is an anti-freeze alarm and the time delay in AL35>0, if the unit is manually
turned on in heat pump from keyboard or remote input, the alarm is reset so the unit can start at least for the
time set in AL35 in order to heat the water or the air. After the AL35 delay if the anti-freeze probe is still lower
than AL33 setpoint for AL36 seconds the unit is locked again with an anti-freeze alarm.

b1hP - b2hP High pressure / Condensing High temperature of the Circuit

Label on alarm b1hP (high pressure digital input of the circuit #1)
visualization menu b2hP (high pressure digital input of the circuit #2)
Origin In chiller or heat pump, if the condensing probe is higher than AL09 setpoint.
Reset If the condensing probe value is lower than AL09 –AL10 (differential)
Restart Reset procedure in Menu function.
Always manual AL54 = 0
Always automatic AL54 =16
From manual to utomatic if AL54 value is between 1 and 15
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on
Regulation
Condensing fan If FA02=0 the fan is forced at maximum speed for 60 seconds then switched
off
If FA02=1 the fan is forced at maximum speed for 60 seconds then regulate
according to normal fan regulation

b1LP - b2LP low pressure switch circuit #1 or 2


Label on alarm b1LP (low pressure switch circuit #1)
visualization menu b2LP (low pressure switch circuit #2)

Pag. 113 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Origin  With the digital input is active


 If AL08=1, also in stand-by or remote OFF, when the low pressure switch
input is active.
 In defrost if AL06=1 when the compressor low pressure switch input is
active.
The alarm is not signalled if :
 In defrost for the time AL07 when the 4-way valve is activated.
 During the AL01 delay after turning on the compressor.
Reset Digital input not active
Restart Automatic - Manual after AL05 events per hour (Reset procedure in Menu
function)
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on

b1lp - b2lp Low evaporating pressure of the circuit (with pressure transducers only)
Label on alarm b1lP (low evaporator pressure from analogue input #1)
visualization menu b2lP (low evaporator pressure from analogue input #2)
Origin The alarm is activated when at least one of the probes , configured as
evaporating control, is lower than AL03 setpoint if:
 In chiller or heat pump mode;
 Stand-by or remote OFF when AL08 = 1
 In defrost when AL06=1
The alarm is not signalled if:
 In defrost ,for the time AL07, when the 4-way valve is turned on.
 For the time set in AL01 after turning on the compressor.
Reset When the condensing probe temperature is higher than AL03 + AL04
(differential)
Restart Automatic– Manual after AL05 events per hour (Reset procedure in Menu
function).
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on

ATTENTION When the pressure transducers are configured the low pressure alarms are related only to
transducer values.

b1tF- b2tf Condenser fan overload alarm


Label on alarm b1tF (Condenser fan overload alarm of the circuit #1)
visualization menu b2tF (Condenser fan overload alarm of the circuit #2)
Origin When the digital input is active
Reset When the digital input is not active
Restart Manual (reset from the function menu)
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON

AEun: Unloading from low temperature of the evaporator water outlet


Label on alarm b1EU Unload signalling from evaporator circuit n° 1
visualization menu b2EU Unload signalling from evaporator circuit n° 2
Origin During normal running condition when the temperature of evaporator water
outlet is higher than CO55 setpoint
Reset  If the water temperature is lower than CO55 + CO56 (differential)
 With unloading ON after the CO57 time delay.
Restart Automatic
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer

Pag. 114 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Regulation
Compressor OFF
Other loads Not modified

C1HP - C2HP - C3HP - C4HP - C5HP - C6HP compressor high pressure alarms
Label on alarm C1HP ( compressor high pressure alarm 1) – … C6HP (compressor high
visualization menu pressure alarm 6)
Origin The unit is running and the digital input of the compressor high pressure switch
is active
Reset Digital input not active
Restart Reset procedure in Menu function
Reset procedure in Menu function
Always manual AL54 = 0
Always automatic AL54 =16
From manual to utomatic if AL54 value is between 1 and 15
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on
Regulation
Condensing fan If FA02=0 the fan is forced at maximum speed for 60 seconds then switched
off
If FA02=1 the fan is forced at maximum speed for 60 seconds then regulate
according to normal fan regulation

C1oP - C2oP - C3oP - C4oP - C5oP - C6oP - Pressure switch alarm / compressor oil
Label on alarm C1oP (Compressor pressure switch #1) … C6oP (Compressor pressure switch
visualization menu #6)
Origin The alarm is not signalled: during the AL01 delay after turning on the
compressor, during the AL12 delay that starts after the AL11 delay when the
unit is properly running
Reset Digital input not active
Restart Automatic - Manual after AL013 events per hour (Reset procedure in Menu
function).
If AL76=1 the alarm is only a warning and the compressor remains on
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay + and buzzer on

OIL ALARM FROM PRESSOSTAT SWITCH OR OIL LEVEL SWITCH (screw)


Occasionally it is possible to find both the safety systems, the delay, the active input duration and the
number of events per hour allow to set-up both the protections.

Par. AL11 Oil alarm delay after on compressor.


It allows to set a time delay before signalling the oil or the oil level switch alarms after the on compressor.
Par. AL12 Duration of the pressure switch / oil level switch in normal operating conditions.
Duration of the oil level switch activation during normal running condition.
It allows to set the time delay before signalling the alarm. AL11 defines the delay counting, it helps to
override the low pressure or the low oil level determined, for example, by a new partialization step of the
compressor itself.
Par. AL13 Maximum number of alarm events per hour.
It determs the maximum number of alarm events before switching the restart from automatic to manual.

C1Pd - C2Pd – compressor oil differential pressure


Label on alarm C1Pd (compressor 1)
visualization menu C2Pd (compressor 2)

Pag. 115 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Origin Pistons compressor:


Compressor oil pressure – evaporating pressure < AL78
Screw compressor:
Condensing pressure – compressor oil pressure > AL78
Reset Pistons compressor:
Compressor oil pressure – evaporating pressure > AL78 + AL79
Screw compressor:
Condensing pressure – compressor oil pressure < AL78 - AL79
Restart Automatic – Manual after AL80 events per hour (Reset procedure in Menu
function).
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay and buzzer on
Compressor / circuit involved OFF
If more than one compressor is configured in the circuressors are OFF

C1dt - C2dt - C3dt - C4dt - C5dt - C6dt High compressor discharge temperature alarm
Label on alarm C1dt (High discharge temperature of the compressor #1) -…C6dt (High
visualization menu discharge temperature of the compressor #6)
Origin The compressor discharge temperature is higher than AL39 setpoint.
ATTENTION
The display resolution is 0.1°C until the read-out is 99.9, over 100°C it is 1°C.
Reset If the probe value of the high discharge temperature is lower than “AL39 -
AL40 (differential)”
Restart Automatic. Manual when there are AL41 per hour (Reset procedure in Menu
function).
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm Relay and buzzer on
Compressor involved OFF

C1tr - C2tr - C3tr - C4tr - C5tr - C6tr Compressor overload alarm


Label on alarm C1tr (Compressor 1 overload alarm) -…C6tr (Compressor 6 overload alarm)
visualization menu
Origin With active digital input.
The alarm is not detected within the AL19 time delay after the on compressor
Reset When the digital input is not active
Restart AL77=0:
 Manual reset in Alrm menu if AL20=116
 Manual reset in cOtr menu; if AL20=0 or number of alarm per hour =
AL20, password is requested
AL77=1:
 Automatic reset if the nummer of alarm per hour < AL20 or if AL20=16
 Manual reset in Alrm menu if the nummer of alarm per hour = AL20
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Compressor involved OFF if AL47=0 or AL47=1
Compressor not involved OFF if AL47=1

b1dF – b2dF Defrost alarm


Label on alarm b1dF (Defrost alarm of the circuit #1)
visualization menu b2dF (Defrost alarm of the circuit #2)

Pag. 116 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Origin Only in defrost if DF01 = 1,3 (defrost en temperature/pressure or external


contact): when the defrost ends after the DF05 timeout.
Reset  Stand - by or remote ON-OFF.
 Next defrost ends for temperature/pressure.
Restart Automatic if next defrost ends for temperature/pressure, otherwise manual.
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer OFF

b1Cu – b2Cu Unloading disabled from High condensing temperature / pressure in chiller
Label on alarm b1CU (unloading high temperature from condenser of the circuit # 1)
visualization menu b2CU (unloading high temperature from condenser of the circuit # 2)
Origin When the temperature/pressure of condenser probe control is higher then
CO44
Reset  When the temperature/pressure of condenser probe is lower than CO44 –
CO45 (differential)
 After unloading is activated and after Par. CO47
Restart Automatic
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer OFF

b1Cu – b2Cu: Unloading from low condensing temperature / pressure in Heat pump
Label on alarm b1CU (unloading message from condenser #1)
visualization menu b2CU (unloading message from condenser #2)
Origin During normal running condition when the temperature/pressure of
evaporator/condenser probe is lower than < CO46 setpoint
Reset  when the temperature/pressure of evaporator/condenser probe value is
higher than CO46 + CO47
 After unloading is activated and after Par. CO48
Restart Automatic
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer OFF

b1rC – b2rC recovery disabled from high condensing temperature/pressure in Chiller


Label on alarm b1rC (recovery disabled message from circuit #1)
visualization menu b2rC (recovery disabled message from circuit #2)
Origin In normal running condition when the temperature/pressure probe value is
higher than the set rC06
Reset  When the temperature/pressure probe value is lower than the rC06 –
rC07(differential)
 Unloading start after the time delay Par. rC08
Restart Automatic
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer OFF

b1PH - b2PH: Pump Down stop alarm from pressure switch / Low pressure switch
Label on alarm b1PH (Pump down stop alarm of the circuit 1)
visualization menu b2PH (Pump down stop alarm of the circuit 2)
Origin Pressure switch: if CO36 = 1,2,3,4 and ID not active, the pump down stops
because of the timeout CO39.
Transducer: if CO36 = 1,2,3,4 and the set CO37 is not reached: the pump
stops because of the timeout CO39.

Pag. 117 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Reset From thermoregulation start-up and ID not active


From thermoregulation start-up with evaporating pressure higher than CO37 +
CO38 (differential)
Restart Automatic – Manual and logged after AL21 events per hour (reset procedure in
function menu).
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON when it becomes manual

b1PL - b2PL Alarm during the Pump Down start-up from pump down pressure switch / Low
pressure transducer
Label on alarm b1PL (pump down alarm in start-up of circuit #1)
visualization menu b2PL (pump down alarm in start-up of circuit #2)
Origin Pump down pressure switch : CO36 = 1,2,3,4 and compressors start-up and
digital input not active for the time set in CO39
Pump down transducer: CO36 = 1,2,3,4, compressors start-up and the set
CO37 is not reached in the interval time CO39.
Reset From thermoregulation start-up and ID not active
From thermoregulation start-up with evaporating pressure higher than CO37 +
CO38 (differential)
Restart Automatic - Manual and logged after AL21 events per hour if AL23=1 (reset
procedure in function menu).
If AL23 = 0 it is automatic and not logged.
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON when it becomes manual

C1Mn - C2Mn - C3Mn - C4Mn - C5Mn - C6Mn Compressor maintenance


Label on alarm C1Mn (Compressor #1 maintenance) –…C6Mn (Compressor #6 maintenance)
visualization menu
Origin Compressor running hours > Hour counter setpoint
Reset Hour reset in function menu
Restart Manual
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Regulation
Action Only display warning messages
Loads Not changed

AEP1 - AEP2 Pump/ supply fan maintenance


Label on alarm AEP1 (Evaporator #1 pump maintenance)
visualization menu AEP2 (Evaporator #2 pump maintenance)
Origin Pump/supply fan running hours > Hour counter setpoint
Reset Hour reset in function menu
Restart Manual
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Regulation
Action Only display warning messages
Loads Not changed

ACP1 - ACP1 Condenser pump mintenance


Label on alarm ACP1 (Condenser #1 pump maintenance)
visualization menu ACP1 (Condenser #2 pump maintenance)

Pag. 118 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Origin Pump running hours > Hour counter setpoint


Reset Hour reset in function menu
Restart Manual
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Regulation
Action Only display warning messages
Loads Not changed

ASAn Sanitary water pump mintenance


Label on alarm ASAn (Sanitary water pump maintenance)
visualization menu
Origin Pump running hours > Hour counter setpoint
Reset Hour reset in function menu
Restart Manual
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Regulation
Action Only display warning messages
Loads Not changed

ASUn Solar panel water pump mintenance


Label on alarm ASUn (Sanitary water pump maintenance)
visualization menu
Origin Pump running hours > Hour counter setpoint
Reset Hour reset in function menu
Restart Manual
Symbol On the display the symbol is blinking
Action Alarm relay + buzzer ON
Regulation
Action Only display warning messages
Loads Not changed

Alarm relay and buzzer


Alarm relay / buzzer outputs

Origin Alarms still active


Alarms not reset
Reset relay alarm Whitout alarms
In stand- by or remote ON-O FF if AL42 = 1
Buzzer silencing By pushing one of the key of the front panel

The alarm relay is enabled only by configurating the corresponding output resource.

Keyaboard Alarm

Label on alarm
keyaboard Alarm description
visualization menu
No data communication between the keyaboard
noL
and the regulator.

Pag. 119 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

49. AUTOMATIC TO MANUAL ALARM PROCEDURE


NUMBER OF EVENTS PER HOUR

Each hour counting is divided in 16 intervals, each made of 3600 / 16 = 225 seconds (3 minuts and 45
seconds).

1°Int 2°Int 3°Int 4°Int 5°Int 6°Int 7°Int 8°Int 9°Int 10°Int 11°Int 12°Int 13°Int 14°Int 15°Int 16°Int

After the unit start-up, each interval is marked as “not active”. During the interval counting, for 255seconds, if
at least an alarm event appears, the interval itself is marked “Active”.
Starting from the first interval the instrument calculates the 16 intervals and, at the end, it restats overwriting
from the first.
In this way the last hour is always monitored and counted the active intervals. when the number of active
intervals reaches the threshold set with the corresponding parameter the alarm becomes manual.
By setting the threshold (parameter)=0 the alarm is manual from its first activation while if the threshold=16
the alarm is always automatic (In this case, to change in manual, the threshold should be 17).

Pag. 120 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

49.1 Alarm

Alarm Alarm description Comp. Anti freeze Support Evaporator Condenser Sanitary Solar Ventilaz. Auxiliary
Code heaters heaters Pump / Pump Water panel cond. relay
Boiler Supply fan pump Water Cir1 Cir2
pump
AP1..AP Yes (1) Yes (1)
Probe alarm Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1)
10
Low air temperature of the
ALti evaporator inlet (air / air unit)
Alarm
AEFL Evaporator flow alarm Yes Yes (boiler) Yes (3) Yes
ACFL Condenser flow alarm Yes Yes (3) Yes
AHFL Sanitary water flow switch alarm Yes (6) Yes Yes
APFL Solar panel flow switch alarm Yes (6) Yes Yes
AtSF Fan supply overload alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes
Evaporator 1 water pump overload
AtE1 Yes (4) Yes (boiler) (5) Yes Yes
alarm
Evaporator 2 water pump overload
AtE2 Yes (4) Yes (boiler) (5) Yes Yes
alarm
Condenser 1 water pump overload
AtC1 Yes (4) Yes Yes
alarm
Condenser 2 water pump overload
AtC2 Yes (4) Yes Yes
alarm
AtAS Sanitary water pump overload Yes (6)
AtHS Sanitary heaters overload
Evaporator 1 water pump
AEP1
maintenance
Evaporator 2 water pump
AEP2
maintenance support
Condenser 1 water pump
ACP1
maintenance
Condenser 2 water pump
ACP2
maintenance
ASAn Sanitary water pump maintenance
Solar panel water pump
ASUn
maintenance
ArtC Clock alarm
ArtF Clock failure
ALOC Generic alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Pag. 121 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

ALSF Phase sequence alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
AEE Eeprom alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ACF1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Configuration alarm Yes
ACF12
ArtF Faulty clock
ArtC Clock error
Unloading signalling from high
AEUn
temp. of evaporator water
Low evaporator inlet temperature
ALti
in air/air unit
High water temperature inlat
AEht Yes
evaporator
ALC1 General alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ALC2 Genearl alarm type 2 Yes (3) Yes (3) Yes (3) Yes (3) Yes (3) Yes (3)

(1) = if the probe is the regulation probe


(2) = with probe configured as auxiliary relay control
(3) = with manual alarm procedure
(4) = Off compressors with only 1 water pump configured or with 2 pumps but both in alarm from the corresponding digital inputs.
(5) = Boiler heaters off with only 1 water pump configured or with 2 pumps but both in alarm from the corresponding digital inputs (in this case the boiler heaters
are on only with thermoregulation anti-freeze setpoint as evaporator protection function)
(6) Compressors switched off in case of only production of sanitary hot water

49.2 Alarm: Circuit Alarm

Alarm Alarm description Compressors Compressors Fan condensing of Fan condensing


Code of the circuit of the other the circuit (n) of the other
(n) circuit circuit
b(n)HP High pressure switch of the circuit (n) Yes Yes after 60 seconds
b(n)LP Low pressure switch of the circuit (n) Yes Yes
b(n)AC Anti-freeze in chiller of the circuit (n) Yes Yes
b(n)AH Anti-freeze in heat pump of the circuit (n) Yes Yes
b(n)hP High condensing pressure of the circuit (n) Yes Yes after 60 seconds
b(n)hP High condensing temperature from NTC of the circuit (n) Yes Yes after 60 seconds
Low condensing pressure - (evaporating with low pressure transducer)
b(n)LP Yes Yes
with transducer of the circuit of the (n)
b(n)lP Low condensing temperature NTC circuit (n) Yes Yes
b(n)tF Fan overload circuit (n) Yes Yes

Pag. 122 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

b(n)PH Pump down alarm in stop regulation of the circuit (n) Yes Yes
b(n)PL Pump down in regulation start-up of the circuit (n) Yes Yes
b(n)dF Bad defrost circuit (n)
b(n)Cu Unloading from condenser high temp/press of the circuit (n)
b(n)Cu Unloading from evaporator low temp/press of the circuit (n) Yes Yes
b(n)rC Recovery function disabled in circuit (n)
b(n)ds Circuit (n) disabled from keyboard Yes Yes
b(n)Ac Anti-freeze circuit (n) message in chiller
b(n)Ah Anti-freeze circuit (n) message in heat pump

(n) identifies the circuit 1 or 2

49.3 Alarm: Compressor Alarm

Alarm Alarm description Compressor Compressors not involved


Code (n)

C(n)HP Compressor(n) high pressure switch Yes


C(n)oP Compressor(n) oil pressure switch / Oil level switch Yes
C(n)tr Compressor(n) overload Yes
C(n)dt Compressor high discharge temperature Yes
C(n)Pd Compressor oil differential Yes
C(n)dS Compressor (n) disabled from keyboard Yes
C(n)Mn Compressor(n) maintenance

(n) identifies the compressor 1, 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6

Cod. Descrizione allarme Comp. Resistenze Resistenze Pompa Pompa Ventilaz. Relè
Allarme Antigelo appoggio Evap. cond. cond. ausiliario
boiler Vent. Cir1 Cir2
mand.
noL Link problem between the Ichill and the remote keyboard

Pag. 123 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

50. TABLE OF THE PARAMETERS

Label Description

ALL Shows all the parameters

ST Shows only the Thermoregulation parameters

CF Shows only the Configuration parameters

SD Shows only the Dynamic Setpoint parameters

ES Shows only the Energy Saving, RTC parameters

Cr Shows only the compressor rack parameters

CO Shows only the compressor parameters

US Shows only the Auxiliary Output parameters

FA Shows only the Fan Control parameters

Ar Shows only the Antifreeze Control parameters

DF Shows only the Defrost parameters

FS Shows only the Sanitary Water parameters

AL Shows only the Alarm parameters

Parameter Description min max u.m. Resolution


ST 1 Chiller Setpoint ST02 ST03 °C/°F dec/int
ST 2 Chiller minimum Setpoint -30.0 °C
ST01 dec/int
-22 °F
ST 3 Chiller maximum Setpoint 70.0 °C
ST01 dec/int
158 °F
ST 4 Heat pump setpoint ST05 ST06 °C/°F dec/int
ST 5 Heat pump minimum Setpoint -30.0 °C Dec
ST04
-22 °F int
ST 6 Heat pump maximum Setpoint 70.0 °C Dec
ST04
158 °F int
ST 7 Regulation band in chiller mode 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
ST 8 Regulation band in chiller heat pump 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
ST 9 Thermoregulation probe selection in chiller
0= Temperature probe NTC for evaporator inlet
1= Temperature probe NTC for evaporator outlet 1
2= Temperature probe NTC for evaporator outlet 2 0 5
3= Temperature probe NTC for common evaporator outlet
4= Temperature NTC probe from remote panel 1
5= Temperature NTC probe from remote panel 2
ST 10 Thermoregulation probe selection in heat pump
0= Temperature probe NTC for evaporator inlet
1= Temperature probe NTC for evaporator outlet 1
2= Temperature probe NTC for evaporator outlet 2
3= Temperature probe NTC for common evaporator outlet
4= Temperature NTC probe from remote panel 1
5= Temperature NTC probe from remote panel 2
6= Temperature probe for water common inlet of the condenser
0 11
7= Temperature probe for water inlet of the circuit # 1 condenser
8= Temperature probe for water inlet of the circuit # 2 condenser
9= Temperature probe for water outlet of the circuit # 1 condenser
10= Temperature probe for water outlet of the circuit # 2 condenser
11= Temperature probe for water common otlet of the condenser
ATTENTION
To have the same thermoregulation for chiller and heat pump mode, set the
parameters ST09 and ST10 with the same value
ST 11 Type of thermoregulation
0= Proportional 0 1
1= Neutral zone
Pr1 Password 0 999
Pr2 Password 0 999
Pr3 Password 0 999
Display read-out
Parameter Description min max M. u. Resolution
dP 1 Default read-out of the top display 0 17
dP 2 Default read-out of the bottom display 0 21

Pag. 124 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

dP 3 Default display read-out configuration top / bottom


0= Configurable
1= Top display: Evaporator IN, Bottom display: Evaporator OUT
0 3
2= Top display: Condenser IN, Bottom display: Condenser OUT
3=Top display: temperature/Condensing pressure, Bottom Display:
evaporating pressure
dP4 Top display default read-out of the remote terminal_1
0= the read-out depends on the paremeters dP01 – dP02 – dP03 0 1
1= the read-out shows the NTC probe of the remote panel.
dP5 Top display default read-out of the remote terminal_2
0= the read-out depends on the paremeters dP01 – dP02 – dP03 0 1
1= the read-out shows the NTC probe of the remote panel.
dP6 Not used 0 33
dP7 Not used 0 33
dP8 Not used 0 33
dP9 Not used 0 33
Configuration
Parameter Description min max M. u. Resolution
Unit Model
CF 1 Type of unit
0= Air / air Chiller
0 2
1= Air / water Chiller
2= Water / water Chiller
CF 2 Selection type rof unit
1= only chiller
1 3
2= only heat pump
3= chiller and heat pump
CF 3 Condensing unit
0= no 0 1
1= si
Compressors
CF 4 Compressors number for circuit 1
1= 1
2= 2 0 4
3= 3
4= 4
CF 5 Compressors number for circuit 2
0= 0
1= 1 0 3
2= 2
3= 3
CF 6 Number of compressor parzialization
0= none
1= 1 0 3
2= 2
3= 3
Analog Inputs
CF 7 Pressure or temperature analogue input functioning
0 = Temperature / pressure NTC – 4÷20 mA :
The condensing temperature is controlled with NTC probe while for the evaporating
pressures of the circuits 1 and 2 and the pressure probe configured as auxiliary output
1 and 2 are controlled with 4÷20mA transducers.
1 = Pressure control with 4÷20 mA:
To control the evaporating and condensing pressures it is necessary a 4÷20mA
transducer. 0 3
2 = Temperature / pressure NTC – 0÷5Vdc:
The condensing temperature is controlled with NTC probe while for the evaporating
pressures of the circuits 1 and 2 and the pressure probe configured as auxiliary output
1 and 2 are controlled with 0÷5Vdc transducers.
3 = Pressure control with 0÷5Vdc:
To control the evaporating and condensing pressures it is necessary a ratiometric
0÷5Vdc transducer.
CF 8 PB1 Configuration 0 28
If configured as digital input o1 c73
CF 9 PB2 Configuration 0 28
If configured as digital input o1 c73
CF 10 PB3 Configuration 0 35
If configured as digital input o1 c73
CF 11 PB4 Configuration 0 35
If configured as digital input o1 c73
CF 12 PB5 Configuration 0 35
If configured as digital input o1 c73
CF 13 PB6 Configuration 0 35
If configured as digital input o1 c73
CF 14 PB7 Configuration 0 28
If configured as digital input o1 c73
CF 15 PB8 Configuration 0 28
If configured as digital input o1 c73
CF 16 PB9 Configuration 0 28
If configured as digital input o1 c73
CF 17 PB10 Configuration 0 28
If configured as digital input o1 c73
Probe Offset

Pag. 125 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

CF 18 PB1 Offset -12.0 12.0 °C Dec


-21 21 °F int
CF 19 PB2 Offset -12.0 12.0 °C Dec
-21 21 °F int
CF 20 PB3 Offset -12.0 12.0 °C Dec
-21 21 °F int
-5.0 5.0 bar dec
-72 72 psi int
CF 21 PB4 Offset -12.0 12.0 °C Dec
-21 21 °F int
-5.0 5.0 bar dec
-72 72 psi int
CF 22 PB5 Offset -12.0 12.0 °C Dec
-21 21 °F int
-5.0 5.0 bar dec
-72 72 psi int
CF 23 PB6 Offset -12.0 12.0 °C Dec
-21 21 °F int
-5.0 5.0 bar dec
-72 72 psi int
CF 24 PB7 Offset -12.0 12.0 °C Dec
-21 21 °F int
CF 25 PB8 Offset -12.0 12.0 °C Dec
-21 21 °F int
CF 26 PB9 Offset -12.0 12.0 °C Dec
-21 21 °F int
CF 27 PB10 Offset -12.0 12.0 °C Dec
-21 21 °F int
CF 28 Pressure value at 4mA or 0.5 Vdc of the PB3 transducer 0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 psi int
CF 29 Pressure value at 20mA or 5 Vdc of the PB3 transducer 0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 psi int
CF 30 Pressure value at 4mA or 0.5 Vdc of the PB4 transducer 0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 psi int
CF 31 Pressure value at 20mA or 5 Vdc of the PB4 transducer 0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 psi int
CF 32 Pressure value at 4mA or 0.5 Vdc of the PB5 transducer 0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 psi int
CF 33 Pressure value at 20mA or 5 Vdc of the PB5 transducer 0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 psi int
CF 34 Pressure value at 4mA or 0.5 Vdc of the PB6 transducer 0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 psi int
CF 35 Pressure value at 20mA or 5 Vdc of the PB6 transducer 0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 psi int
Digital Inputs
CF 36 Configuration of ID1 0 c73
CF 37 Configuration of ID2 0 c73
CF 38 Configuration of ID3 0 c73
CF 39 Configuration of ID4 0 c73
CF 40 Configuration of ID5 0 c73
CF 41 Configuration of ID6 0 c73
CF 42 Configuration of ID7 0 c73
CF 43 Configuration of ID8 0 c73
CF 44 Configuration of ID9 0 c73
CF 45 Configuration of ID10 0 c73
CF 46 Configuration of ID11 0 c73
CF 47 Configuration of ID12 0 c73
CF 48 Configuration of ID13 0 c73
CF 49 Configuration of ID14 0 c73
CF 50 Configuration of ID15 0 c73
CF 51 Configuration of ID16 0 c73
CF 52 Configuration of ID17 0 c73
CF 53 Configuration of ID18 0 c73
Relay Outputs
CF 54 Configuration of RL1 0 -o1 c77
CF 55 Configuration of RL2 0 -o1 c77
CF 56 Configuration of RL3 0 -o1 c77
CF 57 Configuration of RL4 0 -o1 c77
CF 58 Configuration of RL5 0 -o1 c77
CF 59 Configuration of RL6 0 -o1 c77
CF 60 Configuration of RL7 0 -o1 c77
CF 61 Configuration of RL8 0 -o1 c77
CF 62 Configuration of RL9 0 -o1 c77
CF 63 Configuration of RL10 0 -o1 c77
CF 64 Configuration of RL11 0 -o1 c77
CF 65 Configuration of RL12 0 -o1 c77
CF 66 Configuration of RL13 0 -o1 c77
CF 67 Configuration of RL14 0 -o1 c77
Condensing proportional outputs
CF 68 Circuit 1 output signal:
0= 0 – 10Vdc
0 2
1= 4 ÷ 20mA
2= PWM for mono phase fan control board

Pag. 126 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

CF 69 Circuit 2 output signal:


0= 0 – 10V
0 2
1= 4 ÷ 20Ma
2= PWM for mono phase fan control board
Proportional output
CF 70 Proportional output “out 3”
0= Not enabled
1= Modulated evaporator water pump 0 7
2= Modulated Free cooling valve
3= Not used
4= Auxiliary output 0÷10V n° 1
5= Auxiliary output 0÷10V n° 2
6= Proportional output for inverter compressor 1 (circuit1) o1 C47
7= Proportional output for inverter compressor 2 (circuit 2)
Relay driver ON / OFF
CF 71 Proportional output “out 4”
0= Not enabled
1= Modulated evaporator water pump 0 7
2= Modulated Free cooling valve
3= Not used
4= Auxiliary output 0÷10V n° 1
5= Auxiliary output 0÷10V n° 2
6= Proportional output for inverter compressor 1 (circuit1) o1 C47
7= Proportional output for inverter compressor 2 (circuit 2)
Relay driver ON / OFF
CF 72 Proportional output “out 5”
0= Not enabled
1= Modulated evaporator water pump 0 7
2= Modulated Free cooling valve
3= Not used
4= Auxiliary output 0÷10V n° 1
5= Auxiliary output 0÷10V n° 2
6= Proportional output for inverter compressor 1 (circuit1) o1 C47
7= Proportional output for inverter compressor 2 (circuit 2)
Relay driver ON / OFF
CF 73 Proportional output “out 6”
0= Not enabled
1= Modulated evaporator water pump 0 7
2= Modulated Free cooling valve
3= Not used
4= Auxiliary output 0÷10V n° 1
5= Auxiliary output 0÷10V n° 2
6= Proportional output for inverter compressor 1 (circuit1) o1 C47
7= Proportional output for inverter compressor 2 (circuit 2)
Relay driver ON / OFF
Remote keyboard
CF 74 Remote keyboard 1 configuration
0= Not enabled
0 2
1= Enabled model with ambient temperature sensor
2= Enabled model without ambient temperature sensor
CF 75 Remote Panel 2 configuration
0= Not enabled
0 2
1= Enabled model with ambient temperature sensor
2= Enabled model without ambient temperature sensor
CF 76 Offset of the probe of the remote terminal 1 -12.0 12.0 °C Dec
-10 53 °F int
CF 77 Offset of the probe of the remote terminal 2 -12.0 12.0 °C Dec
-10 53 °F int
Icon function
CF 78 Icon function
0= chiller / heat pump 0 1
1= chiller / heat pump
Chiller / heat pump selection mode
CF 79 0= Chiller / Heat pump selection by keyboard
1= Chiller / Heat pump selection by digital input 0 2
2= Chiller / Heat pump selection by analogue input
Automatic Change over
CF 80 Automatic change over setpoint for chiller/ heat pump selection (CF79 = 2) -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
CF 81 Automatic change over differential (CF79 = 2) 0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
Unit of measurement
CF 82 °C or °F selection
0= °C / °BAR 0 1
1= °F / °psi
Supply voltage frequency
CF 83 Power supply frequency
0= 50 Hz
1= 60 Hz
2= Vcc power supply 0 2
(ATTENTION
When CF83 = 2 the proportional outputs for fan control are not enabled and the
frequency alarm is inhibited)
Serial Address

Pag. 127 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

CF 84 Serial address 1 247


CF 85 Firmware Release (only reading)
CF 86 Eeprom parameter map (only reading)
Regulation of unbalanced compressors (different power)
CF 87 Compressor 1 capacity 0 100%
CF 88 Compressor 2 capacity 0 100%
CF 89 Compressor 3 capacity 0 100%
CF 90 Compressor 4 capacity 0 100%
CF 91 Compressor 5 capacity 0 100%
CF 92 Compressor 6 capacity 0 100%
CF 93 Maximum number of start up of the compressor in 15 minutes
0 15
0= Not enabled
Working mode of the compressor
CF 94 Working mode of the compressor
0 = chiller and heat pump
0 2
1 = only chiller
2 = only heat pump
Hybrid exchangers
CF 95 Enable hybrid exchangers 0 1
Buzzer presence
CF 96 Buzzer presence (0=disabled, 1=enabled) 0 1
Chiller operations
CF 97 Chiller operation (1=only compressor; 2=only Free cooling; 3=compressors and Free
0 3
cooling)
Dynamic Setpoint
Parameters Description min max M. u. Resolution
Sd 1 Maximum dynamic Offset in chiller mode -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
-54 54 °F int
Sd 2 Maximum dynamic Offset in heat pump mode -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
-54 54 °F int
Sd 3 External air setpoint in chiller mode -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
Sd 4 External air setpoint in heat pump mode -30 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
Sd 5 External air differential in chiller mode -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
-54 54 °F int
Sd 6 External air differential in heat pump mode -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
-54 54 °F int
Sd 7 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Dynamic set point: summer offset analog 1 -54 54 °F int
Sd 8 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Dynamic set point: winter offset analog 1 -54 54 °F int
Sd 9 -30 70.0 °C Dec
Summer outside temperature analog 1 -22 158 °F int
Sd 10 -30 70.0 °C Dec
Winter outside temperature analog 1 -22 158 °F int
Sd 11 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Summer outside temp. differential analog 1 -54 54 °F int
Sd 12 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Winter outside temp. differential analog 1 -54 54 °F int
Sd 13 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Dynamic set point: summer offset analog 2 -54 54 °F int
Sd 14 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Dynamic set point: winter offset analog 2 -54 54 °F int
Sd 15 -30 70.0 °C Dec
Summer outside temperature analog 2 -22 158 °F int
Sd 16 -30 70.0 °C Dec
Winter outside temperature analog 2 -22 158 °F int
Sd 17 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Summer outside temp. differential analog 2 -54 54 °F int
Sd 18 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Winter outside temp. differential analog 2 -54 54 °F int
Sd 19 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Dynamic set point: summer offset relay AUX1 -54 54 °F int
Sd 20 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Dynamic set point: winter offset relay AUX1 -54 54 °F int
Sd 21 -30 70.0 °C Dec
Summer outside temperature relay AUX1 -22 158 °F int
Sd 22 -30 70.0 °C Dec
Winter outside temperature relay AUX1 -22 158 °F int
Sd 23 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Summer temperature differential relay AUX1 -54 54 °F int
Sd 24 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Winter temperature differential relay AUX1 -54 54 °F int
Sd 25 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Dynamic set point: summer offset relay AUX2 -54 54 °F int
Sd 26 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Dynamic set point: winter offset relay AUX2 -54 54 °F int
Sd 27 -30 70.0 °C Dec
Summer outside temperature relay AUX2 -22 158 °F int
Sd 28 -30 70.0 °C Dec
Winter outside temperature relay AUX2 -22 158 °F int

Pag. 128 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Sd 29 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec


Summer temperature differential relay AUX2 -54 54 °F int
Sd 30 -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
Winter temperature differential relay AUX2 -54 54 °F int
Energy saving
Parameters Description min max udm Risoluzione
ES 1 Start of the Time band 1 (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
ES 2 End of the Time Band 1 (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
ES 3 Start of the Time band 2 (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
ES 4 End of the Time Band 2 (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
ES 5 Start of the Time band 3 (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
ES 6 End of the Time Band 3 (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
ES 7 Monday: energy saving activated
0-0 7-7
Automatic unit on-off
ES 8 Tuesday energy saving activated
0-0 7-7
Automatic unit on-off
ES 9 Wednesday energy saving activated
0-0 7-7
Automatic unit on-off
ES 10 Thursday energy saving activated
0-0 7-7
Automatic unit on-off
ES 11 Friday energy saving activated
0-0 7-7
Automatic unit on-off
ES 12 Saturday energy saving activated
0-0 7-7
Automatic unit on-off
ES 13 Sunday energy saving activated
0-0 7-7
Automatic unit on-off
ES 14 Energy Saving setpoint offset in chiller mode -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
-54 54 °F int
ES 15 Energy Saving differential in chiller mode 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
ES 16 Energy Saving setpoint offset in heat pump mode -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
-54 54 °F int
ES 17 Energy Saving differential in heat pump mode 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
ES 18 Maximum ON time when the unit is switched on by keyboard starting from OFF state
by RTC 1 250 Min 10 Min
0= Not enabled
ES 19 Start of the Time band 1 Sanitary water (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
ES 20 End of the Time band 1 Sanitary water (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
ES 21 Start of the Time band 2 Sanitary water (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
ES 22 End of the Time band 2 Sanitary water (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
ES 23 Start of the Time band 3 Sanitary water (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
ES 24 End of the Time band 3 Sanitary water (0÷24) 0 24.00 Hr 10 Min
nd
ES 25 Monday: Sanitary water 2 set point activation 0 7
nd
ES 26 Tuesday: Sanitary water 2 set point activation 0 7
nd
ES 27 Wednesday: Sanitary water 2 set point activation 0 7
nd
ES 28 Thursday: Sanitary water 2 set point activation 0 7
ES 29 Friday: Sanitary water 2nd set point activation 0 7
ES 30 Saturday: Sanitary water 2nd set point activation 0 7
ES 31 Sunday: Sanitary water 2 set point activation 0 7
ES 32 2nd set point Sanitary water offset -30.0 30.0 °C Dec
-54 54 °F int
ES 33 2nd set point Sanitary water differential 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
Compressors rack
Cr1 Type of functioning compressor rack
0= Not enabled
0 2
1= regulation by ST09 probe
2 = regolation by pressure probe (Evaporator pressure probe)
Cr2 Set point compressor suction probe Bar Dec
Cr03 Cr04
Psi int
Cr3 Minimum set point compressor suction probe Bar Dec
0 Cr03
Psi int
Cr4 Maximum set point compressor suction probe 50 Bar Dec
Cr03
725 Psi int
Cr5 Regulation band suction probe 0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
1 203 Psi int
Cr6 Set energy saving compressor rack 0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 psi int
Cr7 Differential energy savingcompressor rack 0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
1 203 Psi int
Cr8 Number of compressors enabled in case of failure probe
0 6
0÷6
Cr9 Number od ventilation step in case of failure probe
0 4
0÷4
Compressors
Parameters Description min max udm Risoluzione
CO 1 Minimum compressor ON time after the start-up. 0 250 10 sec 10 sec
CO 2 Minimum compressor OFF time after the switching off. 0 250 10 sec 10 sec
CO 3 ON delay time between two compressors or compressor and valve. During this time
the led of the next resource is blinking. 1 250 Sec

Pag. 129 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

CO 4 OFF delay time between two compressors or compressor and valve. During this time
0 250 Sec
the led of the next resource is blinking.
CO 5 Output time delay after the main power supply start-up to the unit.
0 250 10 Sec 10 sec
All the loads are delayed in case of frequently power failures.
Capacity Control
CO 6 Functioning (see Capacity Control)
0= With on/off steps
1= Continuous with steps and direct action 0 3
2= Continuous with steps and reverse action
3= Continuous with steps and direct total action
CO 7 Start-up with minimum compressor power / automatic start-unloading valve
0 = Only at the compressor start-up (Minimum power automatic start-unloading valve
off)
1= At the compressor start-up and during the termoregulation (Minimum power /
automatic start-unloading valve off) 0 3
2 = Only at the screw compressor start-up (Minimum power automatic start-unloading
valve off)
3= At the compressor start-up and during the termoregulation (Minimum power /
Unloading valve ON with compressor off)
CO 8 Relay ON time of the Solenoid valve Intermittent for screw compressor, with 0 the
0 250 Sec
function is not enabled.
CO 9 Relay OFF time of the Solenoid valve Intermittent for screw compressor 0 250 Sec
Compressor start-up
CO 10 Kind of compressor start-up
0= Direct ( vedi avviamento compressors )
0 2
1= Part - winding
2= Star-delta
CO 11 If CO10= 1 part - winding start-up time. To change the time delay between the two
contactors of the two compressor circuits.
1/10
Se CO10= 2 Star-delta start-up time. To change the time delay between the contactor 0 100 0.1 sec
Sec
of the line 1 and the contactor of the centre of the star. (see part – winding /start-
triangle functioning)
CO 12 If CO10= 2 Time of Star-delta start. Time delay to turn off the centre star contactor and 1/10
0 50 0.1 sec
to turn on the line 2 contactor (see Star-delta functioning) Sec
CO 13 By-pass gas valve start-up time / automatic start-unloading valve (capacity step
0 250 sec
control)
Rotating – Balancing – Compressors Thermoregulation
CO 14 Compressor rotation (See compressor rotation)
0 = Sequential
0 2
1 = Compressors rotation based on time running hours
2 = Compressors rotation based on number of starts-up
CO 15 Circuit balancing (See Circuit balancing)
0= Circuit saturation 0 1
1= Circuit balancing
Evaporator water pump
CO 16 Operative mode of the evaporator pump / supply fan (See Evaporator pump function)
0= Not enabled (evaporator pump or supply fan).
1= Continuous. When the unit is running in Chiller or HP the pump or the supply fan is
0 2
running.
2= With compressor. When a compressor is running also the pump or the supply fan is
running.
CO 17 ON compressor delay after water pump / supply fan start-up (See water pump
1 250 10 sec
functioning).
CO 18 OFF delay evaporator water pump / supply fan after compressor switching OFF. This
delay is also active when the unit is turned in stand-by (See evaporator water pump 0 250 Min
function).
CO 19 Number of time running hours for pump rotation (See water pump group function) 0 999 10Hr 10Hr
CO 20 Time to make run the pumps together before rotating from one to the other (See water
0 250 Sec
pump group function)
Condenser water pump
CO 21 Operative mode for condenser water pump (See condenser water pump function)
0= Not enabled.
0 2
1= Continuous. When the unit is running in Chiller or HP the is running.
2= With compressor. When a compressor is running also the pump is running.
CO 22 Free
CO 23 OFF delay condenser water pump after compressor switching OFF. This delay is also
0 250 Min
active when the unit is turned in stand-by (See evaporator water pump function).
CO 24 Number of time running hours for pump rotation (See water pump group function). 0 999 10Hr 10Hr
CO 25 Time to make run the pumps together before rotating from one to the other (See water
0 250 Sec
pump group function).
Load maintenance
CO 26 Compressor 1 operation time to generate maintenance warning 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
CO 27 Compressor 2 operation time to generate maintenance warning 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
CO 28 Compressor 3 operation time to generate maintenance warning 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
CO 29 Compressor 4 operation time to generate maintenance warning 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
CO 30 Compressor 5 operation time to generate maintenance warning 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
CO 31 Compressor 6 operation time to generate maintenance warning 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
CO 32 “Evaporator pump / Supply fan” operation time to generate maintenance warning 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
CO 33 2nd Evaporator pump operation time to generate maintenance warning 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
CO 34 Condenser pump operation time to generate maintenance warning 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
CO 35 2nd Condenser pump operation time to generate maintenance warning 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
Pump down

Pag. 130 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

CO 36 Pump down operating mode (See pump down ON/OFF function)


0= Not enabled
1= Unit off with pump–down, unit on without pump–down
0 4
2= Unit off with pump–down, unit on with pump–down
3= Chiller mode off with pump–down, chiller mode on without pump–down
4= Chiller mode off with pump–down, chiller mode on with pump–down
CO 37 Pump–down pressure setpoint (See pump down ON/OFF function) 0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 psi int
CO 38 Pump-down pressure differential (See pump down ON/OFF function) 0 14.0 Bar Dec
0 203 psi int
CO 39 Maximum pump–down time duration at start-up and stop (See pump down ON/OFF
0 250 Sec
function)
Evaporator Unloading
CO 40 Unloading compressor setpoint in chiller. From high temperature of the evaporator -30 70.0 °C Dec
water inlet (See unloading function). 0 725 °F int
CO 41 Unloading Differential. From high temperature of the evaporator water inlet (See 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
unloading function). 0 45 °F int
CO 42 Delay time to engage the Unloading function from high temperature of the evaporator
1 250 10 Sec 10sec
water inlet (See unloading function).
CO 43 Maximum unloading duration time to keep activated the Unloading function from high
0 250 Min
temperature of the evaporator water inlet (See unloading function).
Condenser Unloading
CO 44 Unloading compressor setpoint. From temperature / pressure in chiller mode (See 0 50.0 Bar Dec
unloading function). 0 725 psi int
CO 45 Unloading Differential. From temperature / pressure in chiller mode (See unloading 0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
function). 0 203 Psi int
CO 46 Unloading compressor setpoint. From temperature / pressure in HP mode (See 0 50.0 Bar Dec
unloading function). 0 725 psi int
CO 47 Unloading Differential. From temperature / pressure in HP mode (See unloading 0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
function). 0 203 Psi int
CO 48 Maximum unloading duration time from temperature/pressure control. 1 250 Min
CO 49 Number of steps for circuit with active unloading
1= 1st step
1 3
2= 2nd step
3= 3rd step
CO 50 Minimum ON time of the capacity step after the unloading function start (only for
0 250 Sec
capacity compressor)
Compressor liquid injection
CO 51 Setpoint of the solenoid valve (on) of the liquid injection 0 150 °C Dec / int
0 302 °F int
CO 52 Setpoint of the solenoid valve (off) of the liquid injection 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
Management resource in neutral zone
CO 53 Maximum time of work in neutral zone without insert resource 0 250 Min 10 Min
CO 54 Maximum time of work in neutral zone without rotation resource 0 999 Hr 1Hr
Evaporator low water temperature Unloading
CO 55 Set point unloading compressor from low evaporator water temperature -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
CO 56 Differential unloading compressor from low evaporator water temperature 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
CO 57 Maximum unloading duration time from low evaporator water temperature
0 250 Min
Pump down to time
CO 58 maximum time pump-down in stopped
0 250 Sec
CO58 = 0 Not enabled
CO 59 maximum time pump-down in started
0 250 Sec
CO59 = 0 Not enabled
Compressor inverter controlled
CO 60 Maximum time start up compressor inverter controlled
0 250 sec
CO 61 Minimum value proportional output from start up compressor
0 100 %
CO 62 Minimum time capacity variation from start up compressor inverter controlled
0 250 sec
CO 63 Minimum percentage continuative of work of the compressor inverter controlled before
0 100 %
to start counting CO64 time
CO 64 Maximum time continuative of work of the compressor with percentage less of CO63 0 250 Min 10 Min
CO 65 Time of forcing the compressor inverter controlled to the maximum power
0 250 sec 10sec
CO 66 Maximum time continuative of work of the compressor inverter controlled
0 999 Hr 1Hr
CO 67 Minimum value of the compressor 1 inverter controlled
0 CO68 %
CO 68 Maximum value of the compressor 1 inverter controlled CO67 100 %
CO 69 Minimum value of the compressor 2 inverter controlled 0 CO70 %
CO 70 Maximum value of the compressor 2 inverter controlled CO69 100 %
CO 71 Minimum time capacity variation compressor inverter controlled 1 250 sec
Tamdem function
CO 72 Maximum operating time of a single compressor
0 250 Min
Load maintenance
CO 73 Sanitary water pump hour counter 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
CO 74 Solar panel water pump hour counter 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr

Pag. 131 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

4 way valve
CO 75 Forced time to reverse the 4 way valve when the compressor is switched off 0 250 sec
Compressors capacity
CO 76 Maximum number of compressors to use in Chiller 1 10
CO 77 Maximum number of compressors to use in Heat pump 1 10
CO 78 Maximum number of compressors to use in Sanitary water 1 10
CO 79 Maximum % output of the inverter compressor in Chiller 1 100 %
CO 80 Maximum % output of the inverter compressor in Heat pump 1 100 %
CO 81 Maximum % output of the inverter compressor in Sanitary water 1 100 %
CO 82 Outside temperature to reduce inverter compressor speed in Heat pump -50.0 70.0 °C Dec
-58 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 Psi int
CO 83 Hysteresis temperature to reduce inverter compressor speed in Heat pump 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
1 203 Psi int
CO 84 Compressor speed if outside temperature > CO82 0 100 %
CO 85 Evaporator water pump OFF time if the set point is reached 0 250 10 min
CO 86 Evaporator water pump OFF time if the machine is STD-BY or OFF 0 250 10 Ore
CO 87 Evaporator water pump ON time 0 250 Sec 10sec
CO 88 Condenser water pump OFF time if the set point is reached 0 250 10 min
CO 89 Condenser water pump OFF time if the machine is STD-BY or OFF 0 250 10 Ore
CO 90 Condenser water pump ON time 0 250 Sec 10sec
CO 91 Minimum time between to switch on of the compressor 0 250 Sec
CO 92 Compressor activation delay starting from water solenoid valve activation 0 250 Sec
CO 93 Water solenoid valve de-activation delay starting from compressor de-activation 0 250 Sec
CO 94 % output of the inverter compressor in defrost 0 100 %
CO 95 Free cooling water pump operation time to generate maintenance warning 0 999 10 Hr 10 Hr
CO 96 % output of the inverter compressor in unloading 0 100 %
Auxiliary relay menu function
Auxiliary relay of the circuit 1
US 1 Auxiliary relay 1 operating mode (See graph and auxiliary relay functions)
0= Not enabled
1= Always available with direct action
0 4
2= Available only when the unit is on with direct action
3= Always available with reverse action
4= Available only when the unit is on with reverse action
US 2 Analog input configuration for auxiliary relay 1 control. Allows to select which probe value
1 10
Pb1..Pb10 controls the relay
US 3 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US5
0.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 summer minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 4 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US5
50.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 summer maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 5 °C Dec
°F int
US3 US4
Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 summer set point Psi int
US 6 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US8
0.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 winter minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 7 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US8
50.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 winter maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 8 °C Dec
°F int
US6 US7
Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 winter set point Psi int
US 9 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 summer differential 1 203 Psi int
US 10 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 1 winter differential 1 203 Psi int
Auxiliary relay circuit 2
US 11 Auxiliary relay 2 operating mode (See graph and auxiliary relay functions)
0= Not enabled
1= Always available with direct action
0 4
2= Available only when the unit is on with direct action
3= Always available with reverse action
4= Available only when the unit is on with reverse action
US 12 Analogue input configuration for auxiliary relay 2 control . Allows to select which probe
1 10
value Pb1..Pb10 controls the relay

Pag. 132 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

US 13 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US15
0.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 summer minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 14 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US15
50.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 summer maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 15 °C Dec
°F int
US13 US14
Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 summer set point Psi int
US 16 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US18
0.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 winter minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 17 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US18
50.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 winter maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 18 °C Dec
°F int
US16 US17
Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 winter set point Psi int
US 19 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 summer differential 1 203 Psi int
US 20 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Auxiliary relay 2 winter differential 1 203 Psi int
US 21 Maximum operating time of auxiliary realys 0 250 min
Auxiliary proportional output n° 1
US 22 Auxiliary proportional output n° 1 operating mode
0= Not enabled
1= Always available with direct action
0 4
2= Available only when the unit is on with direct action
3= Always available with reverse action
4= Available only when the unit is on with reverse action
US 23 Analogue input configuration for auxiliary control 1
1 10
Allows to select which probe value Pb1..Pb10 controls output
US 24 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US26
0.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 summer minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 25 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US26
50.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 summer maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 26 °C Dec
°F int
US24 US25
Bar Dec
Analog output 1 summer set point Psi int
US 27 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US29
0.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 winter minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 28 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US29
50.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 winter maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 29 °C Dec
°F int
US27 US28
Bar Dec
Analog output 1 winter set point Psi int
US 30 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 summer differential 0 203 Psi int
US 31 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 1 winter differential 0 203 Psi int
US 32 Analog output 1 minimum value 0 US33 %
US 33 Analog output 1 maximum value US32 100 %
Auxiliary proportional output n° 2
US 34 Auxiliary proportional output n° 2 operating mode
0= Not enabled
1= Always available with direct action
0 4
2= Available only when the unit is on with direct action
3= Always available with reverse action
4= Available only when the unit is on with reverse action
US 35 Analogue input configuration for auxiliary 2 control
1 10
Allows to select which probe value Pb1..Pb10 controls output

Pag. 133 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

US 36 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US38
0.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 summer minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 37 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US38
50.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 summer maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 38 °C Dec
°F int
US36 US37
Bar Dec
Analog output 2 summer set point Psi int
US 39 -30.0 °C Dec
-22 °F int
US41
0.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 winter minimum set point 0 Psi int
US 40 70.0 °C Dec
158 °F int
US41
50.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 winter maximum set point 725 Psi int
US 41 °C Dec
°F int
US39 US40
Bar Dec
Analog output 2 winter set point Psi int
US 42 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 summer differential 0 203 Psi int
US 43 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
Analog output 2 winter differential 0 203 Psi int
US 44 Analog output 2 minimum value 0 US45 %
US 45 Analog output 2 maximum value US44 100 %
US 46 Operation mode under minimum value 0 1
Modulating evaporator water pump
US 47 Probe 1 selection for evaporator water pump modulation in chiller 0 10
US 48 Probe 2 selection for evaporator water pump modulation in chiller 0 10
US 49 Set point for maximum speed of modulationg evaporator water pump in chiller 30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-58 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 Psi int
US 50 Proportional band for maximum speed of modulationg evaporator water pump in chiller 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
0 203 Psi int
US 51 Minimum speed of the evaporator water pump in chiller 0 100 %
US 52 Maximum speed of the evaporator water pump in chiller 0 100 %
US 53 Probe 1 selection for evaporator water pump modulation in Heat Pump 0 10
US 54 Probe 2 selection for evaporator water pump modulation in Heat Pump 0 10
US 55 Set point for maximum speed of modulationg evaporator water pump in Heat Pump 30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-58 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 Psi int
US 56 Proportional band for maximum speed of modulationg evaporator water pump in Heat 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
Pump 0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
0 203 Psi int
US 57 Minimum speed of the evaporator water pump in Heat Pump 0 100 %
US 58 Maximum speed of the evaporator water pump in Heat Pump 0 100 %
US 59 Speed of the water pump in Free Cooling 0 100 %
US 60 Speed of the water pump when compressor OFF 0 100 %
AUX output enable
US 61 AUX 1 relay operation mode
1= only in Chiller
1 3
2= only in Heat pump
3= in Chiller and Heat pump
US 62 AUX 2 relay operation mode
1= only in Chiller
2= only in Heat pump
3= in Chiller and Heat pump
US 63 AUX 1 analog output operation mode
1= only in Chiller
2= only in Heat pump
3= in Chiller and Heat pump
US 64 AUX 2 analog output operation mode
1= only in Chiller
2= only in Heat pump
3= in Chiller and Heat pump
Condenser fan
Parameters Description min max M. U. Resolution

Pag. 134 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

FA 1 Fan configuration output


0 = Not enabled
1 = Always on
0 4
2 = ON/OFF regulation with steps
3 = ON/OFF Continuous regulation
4 = Proportional speed control
FA 2 Fan operating mode
0= Dependent from the compressor 0 1
1= Independent from the compressor
FA 3 If the condenser fan control is the triac output, when the regulation starts the trigger
output will drive the condenser fan at the maximum voltage for the time FA 3 then, 0 250 Sec
then the regulation will follow the temperature/pressure of the probe.
FA 4 Phase shifting of the fan motor Micro
0 8 250s
Sec
FA 5 Number of condensing circuits
0= one condenser circuit 0 1
1= tow condenser circuits
FA 6 Pre-ventilation time before turning on the compressor in chiller mode.
To turn on the fan at the maximum speed before the compressor and reduce the 0 250 Sec
successive condensing temperature/pressure increasing. (only if FA01=4)
Fan in Chiller mode
FA 7 Minimum speed for condenser fan in Chiller mode.
To set the minimum fan speed percentage value (30..100%), it is related to the fan 0 100 %
power supply.
FA 8 Maximum speed for condenser fan in Chiller mode.
To set the maximim fan speed percentage value (30..100%), it is related to the fan 0 100 %
power supply.
FA 9 Proportional speed control FA01 = 4 -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
Temperature or pressure limit to enable the minimum speed FA 7 -22 158 °F int
ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3 0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
SETpoint step n° 1 0 725 Psi int
FA 10 Proportional speed control FA01 = 4 -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
Temperature or pressure limit to enable the maximum speed FA 8 -22 158 °F int
ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3 0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
SETpoint step n° 2 0 725 Psi int
FA 11 Proportional speed control FA01 = 4
Proportional band for condenser fan control in chiller 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
To set the temperature/pressure differential between the minimum and the maximum 0 45 °F int
of the fan speed regulation. 0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3 0 203 Psi int
Differential step circuit n° 1
FA 12 Proportional speed control FA01 = 4
0.0 25.0 °C Dec
CUT-OFF differential in chiller. To set a temperature/pressure differential to stop the
0 45 °F int
fan.
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3
0 203 Psi int
Differential step circuit n° 2
FA 13 Over ride CUT- OFF in chiller. To set a temperature/pressure differential to keep the 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
minimum fan speed. 0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
0 203 Psi int
FA 14 CUT-OFF time delay. To set a time delay before activating the CUT-OFF function after
the fan start-up.
If after the compressor start-up the proportional regulator requires to turn off the fan 0 250 Sec
(cut-off) and FA140, the fan is on at the minimum speed for the time set in this
parameter. If FA14=0 the function is disabled.
FA 15 Night speed in chiller. To set the maximum fan speed percentage value (30..100%), it
0 100 %
is related to the fan power supply.
Fan in Heat pump mode
FA 16 Minimum speed for condenser fan in Heat Pump mode.
To set the minimum fan speed percentage value (30..100%), it is related to the fan 0 100 %
power supply.
FA 17 Maximum speed for condenser fan in Heat Pump mode.
To set the maximum fan speed percentage value (30..100%), it is related to the fan 0 100 %
power supply.
FA 18 Proportional speed control FA01 = 4 -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
Temperature or pressure limit to enable the minimum speed FA16 -22 158 °F int
ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3 0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
SETpoint step n° 1 0 725 Psi int
FA 19 Proportional speed control FA01 = 4 -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
Temperature or pressure limit to enable the maximum speed FA17 -22 158 °F int
ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3 0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
SETpoint step n° 2 0 725 Psi int
FA 20 Proportional speed control FA01 = 4
Proportional band for condenser fan control in heat pump 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
To set the temperature/pressure differential between the minimum and the maximum 0 45 °F int
of the fan speed regulation. 0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3 0 203 Psi int
Differential step circuit n° 1
FA 21 Proportional speed control FA01 = 4
0.0 25.0 °C Dec
CUT-OFF differential in heat pump. To set a temperature/pressure differential to stop
0 45 °F int
the fan.
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3
0 203 Psi int
Differential step circuit n° 2

Pag. 135 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

FA 22 Over ride CUT- OFF in Heat pump. To set a temperature/pressure differential to keep 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
the minimum fan speed. 0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
0 203 Psi int
FA 23 Night speed in Heat pump. To set the maximum fan speed percentage value
0 100 %
(30..100%), it is related to the fan power supply.
Hot start
FA 24 Hot start setpoint -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
FA 25 Hot start differential 0.0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
3 / 4 step condenser Fan in Chiller mode
FA 26 ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3 -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
SETpoint step n° 3 -22 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 Psi int
FA 27 ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3 -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
SETpoint step n° 4 -22 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 Psi int
3 / 4 step condenser Fan in heat pump
FA 28 ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3 -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
SETpoint step n° 3 -22 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 Psi int
FA 29 ON/OFF regulation FA01 = 2/3 -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
SETpoint step n° 4 -22 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 Psi int
FA 30 Pre ventilation in Heat Pump
0 250 Sec Sec
(only if FA01 = 4 )
FA 31 Post ventilation in Heat Pump 0 250 Sec 10Sec
FA 32 Outside temperature to enable post ventilation in Heat Pump -50.0 70.0 °C Dec
-58 158 °F int
FA 33 Condenser fan speed during post ventilation 0 100 %
Antifreeze heaters – Integration heating - boiler
Parameter Description min max m. u. Risoluzione
Ar 1 Anti-freeze heaters/integration heating setpoint for air/air unit in Chiller mode. -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
To set a temperature value, below this value the anti-freeze relay is activated. -22 158 °F int
Ar 2 Regulation band for antifreeze in Chiller mode. Dec
0.1 25.0 °C
Int
0 45 °F
Ar 3 Set Anti-freeze heaters/integration heating setpoint for air/air unit in HP mode. -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
To set a temperature value, below this value the anti-freeze relay is activated. -22 158 °F int
Ar 4 Regulation band for antifreeze in HP mode. -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
Ar 5 Antifreeze heaters / integration heating in defrost
0= ON only with thermoregulation control 0 1
1= ON with thermoregulation and during the defrosting cycle
Ar 6 Antifreeze probe to manage heaters / support heaters in Chiller mode.
0= Not enabled
1= Evaporator inlet 0 3
2= Evaporator outlet 1 and 2
3= Evaporator outlet 1 and 2 and common outlet
Ar 7 Antifreeze probe to manage heaters / support heaters in HP mode.
0= Not enabled
1= Evaporator inlet. 0 3
2= Evaporator outlet 1 and 2.
3= Evaporator outlet 1 and 2 and common outlet.
Ar 8 Thermoregulation probe for anti-freeze / condenser heaters.
0= not enabled.
1= Condenser common water inlet probe.
0 4
2= Condenser common water inlet and condenser inlet 1 / 2 probe.
3= Condenser water outlet 1 / 2 probe.
4= Condenser water outlet 1 / 2 and common outlet.
Ar 9 Anti-freeze heaters or condenser/evaporator water pump control with unit in remote
OFF or stand-by mode:
0 1
0= Control not enable
1=Controlled by anti-freeze thermoregulation.
Ar 10 Anti-freeze heaters control for condenser/evaporator faulty probe:
0= Anti-freeze heaters OFF 0 1
1= Anti-freeze heaters ON
Boiler function
Ar 11 Boiler function
0=Not enabled
0 2
1=Enabled for integration heating
2= Enabled for heating
Ar 12 External air temperaure setpoint for boiler heaters (on) -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
Ar 13 Temperature differential for boiler heaters (off) 0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
Ar 14 Time delay before turning the boiler on 0 250 Min
Boiler function in Chiller mode

Pag. 136 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Ar 15 Setpoint for boiler heaters (on) in chiller -30.0 70.0 °C Dec


-22 158 °F int
Ar 16 Proportional band for boiler heaters in chiller -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
Boiler function in heat pump
Ar 17 Setpoint for boiler heaters (on) in HP -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
Ar 18 Proportional band for boiler heaters in HP 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
Ar 19 External air setpoint to stop the compressor as integration function -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
Ar 20 External air differential to stop the compressor as integration function 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
Anti freeze alarm
Ar 21 Termoregulation probe anti freeze alarm in chiller mode
0= Not enabled
1= Evaporator inlet
0 4
2= Evaporator outlet 1 and 2
3= Evaporator outlet 1 and 2 and common outlet
4= External temperature
Ar 22 Termoregulation probe anti freeze alarm in heat pump mode
0= Not enabled
1= Evaporator inlet
0 4
2= Evaporator outlet 1 and 2
3= Evaporator outlet 1 and 2 and common outlet
4= External temperature
Ar 23 Termoregulation probe anti freeze alarm water condenser
0= not enabled.
1= Condenser common water inlet probe.
0 4
2= Condenser common water inlet and condenser inlet 1 / 2 probe.
3= Condenser water outlet 1 / 2 probe.
4= Condenser water outlet 1 / 2 and common outlet.
Anti freeze alarm
Ar 24 Water pump / antifreeze alarm in OFF/ stand-by
0= Aways in OFF 0 1
1= ON only with thermoregulation control
Ar 25 Termoregulation probe water pump in antifreeze mode
0= Not enabled
1= Evaporator inlet
0 4
2= Evaporator outlet 1 and 2
3= Evaporator outlet 1 and 2 and common outlet
4= External temperature
Ar 26 Set point starting water pump in antifreeze alarm -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
Ar 27 Differential starting water pump in antifreeze alarm 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
Defrost
Parameter Description min max udm Risoluzione
dF 1 Defrost configuration:
0= Not enabled
1= Start and stop for temperature / pressure
2= Start depends on probe selected by par. dF24 and stop for time duration (dF05) 0 5
3= Start depends on probe selected by par. dF24 and stop for external contact
4= Defrost only with condenser fan
5= Start from digital input and stop on probe selected by par. dF24
dF 2 Temperature or pressure of the defrost start-up -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 bar Dec
0 725 psi Int
dF 3 Temperature or pressure of the defrost stop -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 bar Dec
0 725 psi Int
dF 4 Minimum defrost duration. 0 250 Sec
dF 5 Maximum defrost duration. 0 250 Min
dF 6 Time delay between the defrost of two circuits 0 250 Min
dF 7 OFF compressor delay before the defrost 0 250 Sec
dF 8 OFF compressor delay after the defrost 0 250 Sec
dF 9 Defrost interval time of the same circuit 1 99 Min
dF 10 Temperature setpoint for combined defrost of the 1st circuit after parameter DF10 -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
counting. -22 158 °F int
dF 11 Temperature setpoint for combined defrost end of the 1st circuit. -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
dF 12 Temperature setpoint for combined defrost of the 2nd circuit after parameter DF10 -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
counting. -22 158 °F int
dF 13 Temperature setpoint for combined defrost end of the 2nd circuit. -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
dF 14 Activation of all the steps of the 1st circuit during the defrost.
0= Not enabled 0 1
1= Enabled
dF 15 Activation of all the steps of the 2nd circuit during the defrost.
0= Not enabled 0 1
1= Enabled
dF 16 Time delay between two compressor ON in defrost mode 0 250 Sec

Pag. 137 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

dF 17 Fan control during defrost / dripping time


0= Not enabled
0 2
1= Only in defrost
2= For both functions defrost / dripping time
dF 18 Pressure / temperature setpoint to force the ventilation ON during the defrost. -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 bar Dec
0 725 psi Int
Forced defrost
dF 19 Minimum time delay before a forced defrost 0 250 sec
dF 20 Pressure / temperature setpoint for a forced defrost -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 bar Dec
0 725 psi int
dF 21 Forced defrost differential 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
0 203 Psi int
Defrost operative mode
dF 22 Defrost start-up with 2 circuits
0= Independent
0 2
1= If both have reached the necessary requirements
2= If one has reached the necessary requirements
dF 23 End defrost for two circuits and common ventilation.
0= Independent
0 2
1= If both have reached the necessary end defrost requirements
2= If one has reached the necessary end defrost requirements
Start / stop defrost selection
Parameters description min max udm resolution
dF 24 Start / stop defrost probe
0= start and stop with condenser temperatur / pressure probe
1= start with evaporator pressure probe / stop with condenser temperatur / pressure
probe 0 3
2= start with condenser temperatur / pressure probe / stop with evaporator pressure
probe
3= start and stop with evaporator pressure probe
Supply fan operating mode during defrost cycle
dF 25 Stop supply fan diuring defrost cycle
0= Not enabled 0 1
1= enable
Defrost only with condenser fan
dF 26 Set point to enable defrost with condenser fan -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
Hybrid exchangers
dF 27 -50.0 70.0 °C Dec
-58 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 bar Dec
Hybrid exchangers set point 1 in chiller 0 725 psi int
dF 28 -50.0 70.0 °C Dec
-58 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 bar Dec
Hybrid exchangers set point 2 in chiller 0 725 psi int
dF 29 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Hybrid exchangers differential 1 in chiller 1 203 Psi int
dF 30 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Hybrid exchangers differential 2 in chiller 1 203 Psi int
dF 31 -50.0 70.0 °C Dec
-58 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 bar Dec
Hybrid exchangers set point 1 in heat pump 0 725 psi int
dF 32 -50.0 70.0 °C Dec
-58 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 bar Dec
Hybrid exchangers set point 2 in heat pump 0 725 psi int
dF 33 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Hybrid exchangers differential 1 in heat pump 1 203 Psi int
dF 34 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
Hybrid exchangers differential 2 in heat pump 1 203 Psi int
dF 35 Probe selection of the Hybrid exchangers
0= outside temperature 0 1
1= condenser temperature/pressure
dF 36 Forced time Hybrid exchangers in chiller mode when the compressor is switched on 0 250 sec
Defrost dynamic set point
dF 37 -50.0 30.0 °C Dec
Max. offset of the Defrost dinamic set point -54 54 °F int
dF 38 -50.0 70.0 °C Dec
Outside temperature set point of the Defrost dinamic set point -58 158 °F int

Pag. 138 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

dF 39 -50.0 30.0 °C Dec


Outside temperature differential of the Defrost dinamic set point -54 54 °F int
Heat recovery
Parameters Description min max m. u. Resolution
rC 1 Sanitary water regulation mode 0 2
rC 2 Recovery modes
0 = not enabled
0 2
1 = 2 indipendent circuit
2 = both the circuit in parallel
rC 3 Delay time delay with step forced off 0 250 Sec
rC 4 Delay time delay with step forced off after the recovery valve activation 0 250 Sec
rC 5 Recovery minimum time 0 250 Min
rC 6 Minimum interval time between the end and the beginning of the next recovery 0 250 Min
rC 7 Temperature setpoint to disable the recovery -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 Bar Dec
0 725 Psi int
rC 8 Temperature differential to restore the recovery 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 Bar Dec
0 203 Psi int
rC 9 Maximum time with recovery disabled (if temperature/pressure within rC6-rC7) 0 250 Min
Sanitary water
Parameters Description min max m. u. Resolution
FS 1 Sanitary water regulation mode 0 2
0= not enabled
1=valves in water circuit
2=valves in gas circuit
FS 2 Sanitary water thermoregulation priority 0 2
0 = heating / cooling
1 = sanitary water
2 = sanitary water by digital input
FS 3 Sanitary water thermoregulation set point FS05 FS06 °C/°F dec/int
FS 4 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
Sanitary water thermoregulation band 0 45 °F int
FS 5 -30.0 °C Dec
FS06
Minimum value of the sanitary water set point -22 °F int
FS 6 70.0 °C Dec
FS05
Maximum value of the sanitary water set point 158 °F int
FS 7 Full loads enabling to reach the sanitary water set point 0 1
FS 8 Heaters enabling during the sanitary water thermoregulation
0= not enabled
1= compressors + heaters 0 3
2= only heaters
3= only compressors
FS 9 Operation working time to activate the heaters during the sanitary water
0 250 Min
thermoregulation
FS 10 Time delay to activate the sanitary water valve 0 250 sec int
FS 11 Reversing cycle delay during sanitary water thermoregulation 0 250 sec int
FS 12 Antilegionella function operating mode
0 = interval time
0 2
1= weekly
2= daily
FS 13 Delay time between two Antilegionella cycles 0 250 Hr 0
FS 14 Antilegionella Set point FS15 FS16 °C/°F dec/int
FS 15 -30.0 °C Dec
FS14
Minimum value of the Antilegionella set point -22 °F int
FS 16 70.0 °C Dec
FS14
Maximum value of the Antilegionella set point 158 °F int
FS 17 Hour selection for the Antilegionella activation 0 24.00 Hr 10 min
FS 18 Day selection for the Antilegionella activation 0 7
FS 19 Minimum operating working time of the Antilegionella cycle 0 250 min
FS 20 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
Temperature band for heaters deactivation during Antilegionella cycle 0 45 °F int
FS 21 25.0 °C Dec
0.1
Temperature differential to enable the freecooling function 45 °F int
FS 22 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
Temperature differential for the free cooling regulation 0 45 °F int
FS 23 Set point for solar panel activation FS25 FS26 °C/°F dec/int
FS 24 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
Differential value for solar panel deactivation 0 45 °F int
FS 25 -30.0 °C Dec
FS23
Minimum value of the solar panel set point -22 °F int
FS 26 70.0 °C Dec
FS23
Maximum value of the solar panel set point 158 °F int
FS 27 Delay time to activate the sanitary water valve starting from pump activation 0 250 sec
FS 28 Delay time to deactivate the sanitary water pump starting from valve deactivation 0 250 sec
FS 29 Maximum operating working time of the Antilegionella cycle 0 250 min
FS 30 -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
Sanitary water: security set point -22 158 °F int
FS 31 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
Sanitary water: security differential 0 45 °F int
FS 32 Sanitary water: minimum interruption time 0 250 min
FS 33 Sanitary water pump operation mode 0 1

Pag. 139 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

FS 34 Free cooling water pump OFF time if chiller only Free cooling 0 250 min
FS 35 Free cooling water pump ON time if chiller only Free cooling 0 250 sec
FS 36 Free cooling maximum time 0 250 min
FS 37 Set point Free cooling -50.0 70.0 °C Dec
-58 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 bar Dec
0 725 psi int
FS 38 Proportional band Free coling 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.1 14.0 Bar Dec
1 203 Psi int
FS 39 Minimum value Free cooling analog output 0 100 %
FS 40 Maximum value Free cooling analog output 0 100 %
FS 41 T1 probe selection for Free cooling
0 10
0=disabled, 1=Pb1, 2=Pb2, etc.
FS 42 T2 probe selection for Free cooling
0 10
0=disabled, 1=Pb1, 2=Pb2, etc.
FS 43 Outside temperature set point to force the maximum speed of condenser fan -50.0 70.0 °C
-58 158 °F
FS 44 Outside temperature differential to force the maximum speed of condenser fan 0.1 25.0 °C
0 45 °F
FS 45 Delay time of condenser fan regulation during Free cooling 0 250 min
FS 46 Antilegionella cycle opreration mode
0= compressors and heaters
1= compressors are first inserted and then heaters 0 3
2= only heaters
3= only compressors
FS 47 Evaporator water pump enabled is Sanitary water
0= enabled 0 1
1= disabled
FS 48 Probe selection to force exit from Sanitary water
0= disabled
1= probe Pb1 0 10
2= probe Pb2
...
FS 49 Start production Sanitary water
0= when all compressors are requested 0 1
1= when at least one compressor is requested
FS 50 Set point to force OFF the compressors during antilegionella cycle -50.0 70.0 °C
-58 158 °F
FS 51 Compressors safety time in sanitary water
0= safety time enabled 0 1
1= safety time disabled
FS 52 Set point to enable heaters for low sanitary water temperature -50.0 70.0 °C
-58 158 °F
FS 53 Proportional band to enable heaters for low sanitary water temperature 0.1 25.0
0 45
FS 54 Probe selection for low sanitary water temperature
0= disabled
1= Pb1 0 10
2= Pb2
...
FS 55 Solar panel opration mode for sanitary water
0= disabled
0 2
1= integration to heat pump
2= substitution to heat pump
FS 56 Solar panel opration mode for heating
0= disabled
0 2
1= integration to heat pump
2= substitution to heat pump
FS 57 Probe selection to calculate Dt of solar panel in sanitary water
0= disabled
1= Pb1 0 10
2= Pb2

FS 58 Probe selection to calculate Dt of solar panel in heating
0= disabled
1= Pb1 0 10
2= Pb2

FS 59 Dt to enable solar panel in sanitary water 0.1 25.0
0 45
FS 60 Dt to enable solar panel in heating 0.1 25.0
0 45
FS 61 Maximum operation time of solar panel if set point not reached 0 250
FS 62 Probe selection to disable the Free cooling for low temperature 0 10
FS 63 Set point to disable the Free cooling for low temperature -50.0 110.0 °C
-58 230 °F
FS 64 Differential to disable the Free cooling for low temperature 0.1 25.0 °C
0 45 °F
Alarms
Parameters Description min max m. u. Resolution
Low alarm
AL 1 Low pressure alarm delay from analog and digital input 0 250 Sec

Pag. 140 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

AL 2 Low pressure alarm delay from digital input after compressor stop if the low pressure
switch is used for the pump down.
0 250 Sec 10 Sec
AL02= 0 low pressure alarm not enable with compressor OFF
AL02≠ 0 low pressure alarm enable after AL02 time with compressor OFF
AL 3 Low pressure alarm setpoint from analogue input -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 bar Dec
0 725 psi int
AL 4 Low pressure alarm differential from analogue input 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 bar Dec
0 203 psi Int
AL 5 Maximum number of low pressure events from digital/analogue inputs:
Manual reset if AL05 = 0
0 16
Automatic reset if AL05 =16
From automatic to manual reset if AL05= 1..15
AL 6 Low temperature/pressure alarm during defrost
0= Not enabled 0 1
1= Enabled
AL 7 Low temperature/pressure alarm delay during defrost 0 250 Sec
AL 8 Low temperature/pressure alarm with unit in OFF or stand – by:
0 = Not enabled 0 1
1= Alarm enabled
High Alarm
AL 9 High temperature/pressure alarm from analogue input -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
0.0 50.0 bar Dec
0 725 psi int
AL 10 High temperature/pressure alarm differential from analogue input 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
0.0 14.0 bar Dec
0 203 psi int
Oil Alarm
AL 11 Low oil pressure / level delay from digital input 0 250 Sec
AL 12 Minimum time for low oil pressure / level from digital input activation in normal working
0 250 Sec
condition.
AL 13 Maximum number of low oil pressure/level events:
Always manual reset if AL13= 0
0 16
Always automatic reset if AL13 =16
From automatic to manual reset if AL13 = 1..15
Flow alarm
AL 14 Configuration
0= Not enabled
1= Only for chiller 0 3
2= Only for heat pump
3= For both chiller and heat pump
AL 15 “Flow switch / supply fan overload” alarm delay after pump/fun activation. 0 250 Sec
AL 16 Flow switch time activation before blocking evaporator water pump 0 250 Sec
AL 17 “Flow switch / supply fan overload” activation time to generate the alarm 0 250 Sec
AL 18 “Flow switch / supply fan overload” de-activation time to reset the alarm 0 250 Sec
Compressor overload alarm
AL 19 Compressor overload alarm delay after compressor start-up 0 250 Sec
AL 20 Maximum number of compressor overload alarm events
Always manual reset if AL20 = 0
0 16
Always automatic reset if AL20 =16
From automatic to manual reset if AL20 =1..15
Pump down alarm
AL 21 Maximum number of pump down alarm events per hour in stop condition. After this
number the alarm is logged, displayed and signalled with alarm relay + buzzer.
Manual reset if AL21 = 0 0 16
Automatic reset if AL21 =16
From automatic to manual reset if AL21 =1..15
AL 22 Maximum number of pump down alarm events per hour in start-up condition. After this
number the alarm is logged, displayed and signalled with alarm relay + buzzer.
Always manual reset if AL22 = 0 0 16
Always automatic reset if AL22 =16
From automatic to manual reset if AL21 =1..15 and parameter AL23 config.
AL 23 Select if the pump down alarm must change from automatic to manual reset:
0= Always automatic reset 0 1
1= Manual reset after AL21 alarm events
Anti-freeze alarm in Chiller mode
AL 24 Minimum antifreeze setpoint in chiller (from –30 °C to AL24) -30.0 °C Dec
AL26
-22 °F int
AL 25 Maximum antifreeze setpoint in chiller (from AL24 to 70 °C) 70.0 °C Dec
AL26
158 °F int
AL 26 Setpoint temperature for low anti-freeze alarm, low ambient temperature (air/air), low
AL24 AL25 °C/°F Dec/int
temperature air outlet (air/air). From AL24 to AL25.
AL 27 Differential of alarm reset in Chiller mode for anti-freeze, low ambient air temperature 0 25.0 °C Dec
or low outlet air temperature alarms. 0 45 °F int
AL 28 Alarm delay for anti-freeze, low ambient air temperature or low outlet air temperature.
The temperature must be lower than AL26 for this time duration before having the 0 250 Sec
alarm event.

Pag. 141 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

AL 29 Maximum number of alarm events anti-freeze, low ambient air temperature or low
outlet air temperature before changing from automatic to manual alarm reset:
Always manual reset if AL29 = 0 0 16
Always automatic reset if AL29 = 16
From automatic to manual if AL29 = 1. .15
AL 30 Anti-freeze alarm configuration in chiller
0= to turn the compressors off when the anti-freeze control probe is lower than AL26
(after the time delay), the display shows the alarm label.
Buzzer and Alarm relay are not activated. 0 1
1= to turn the compressors off when the anti-freeze control probe is lower than AL26
(after the time delay), the display shows the alarm label.
Buzzer and Alarm relay are activated.
Anti-freeze alarm in Heat pump mode
AL 31 Setpoint of the minimum limit in heat pump (va da – 30 °C a AL32) -30.0 °C Dec
AL33
-22 °F int
AL 32 Setpoint of the maximum limit in heat pump (va da AL31 a 70 °C) 70.0 °C Dec
AL33
158 °F int
AL 33 Anti-freeze alarm setpoint in heat pump
Setpoint temperature for low anti-freeze alarm, low ambient temperature (air/air), low AL31 AL32 °C/°F Dec/int
temperature air outlet (air/air). (from AL31 to AL32)
AL 34 Alarm differential in heat pump. To reset the anti-freeze, low ambient Temperature 0 25.0 °C Dec
(air/air), low temperature air outlet (air/air) alarms. 0 45 °F int
AL 35 Anti-freeze alarm delay in HP for low outlet air temperature (air/air)
Attention
If during the Stand-by or remote off there is an anti-freeze alarm event, and the AL35
<>0, starting the heat pump mode, from keyboard or digital input. In this case the anti-
freeze alarm is aborted and the compressor starts for the AL35 time to heat the air or 0 250 Sec
the water.
After the AL35 time if the antifreeze probe value is still lower than AL33 setpoint, for
maximum AL36 seconds, the unit is stopped and the anti-freeze alarm is generated
again.
AL 36 Anti-freeze alarm delay for low air ambient temperature or low outlet air temperature in
heat pump normal condition.
0 250 Sec
The detected temperature must be lower than AL33 for the time AL36 before giving the
alarm
AL 37 Maximum number of anti-freeze alarm events for low air ambient temperature or low
outlet air temperature in heat pump. It sets the alarm reset condition:
Always manual reset AL37 = 0 0 16
Always automatic reset AL37 = 16
From automatic to manual reset if AL37 = 1..15
AL 38 Anti-freeze alarm configuration in heat pump
0= to turn the compressors off when the anti-freeze control probe is lower than AL33
(after the time delay), the display shows the alarm label.
Buzzer and Alarm relay are not activated. 0 1
1= to turn the compressors off when the anti-freeze control probe is lower than AL33
(after the time delay), the display shows the alarm label.
Buzzer and Alarm relay are activated.
Compressor high discharge temperature
AL 39 Compressor high discharge temperature setpoint 0 150 °C Dec / int
0 302 °F int
AL 40 Compressor high discharge temperature differential 0 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
AL 41 Number of compressor high discharge temperature events per hour to determine the
alarm reset condition:
Always manual reset if AL41 = 0 0 16
Always automatic reset if AL41 =16
From automatic to manual if AL41 = 1..15
Generic alarm 1
AL 42 Maximum number of generic alarm events (each event stop the regulation) before
turning the alarm from automatic to manual:
Always manual AL42 = 0 0 16
Always automatic AL42 =16
From manual to utomatic if AL42 value is between 1 and 15
AL 43 Generic alarm delay time after the digital input activation 0 250 Sec
AL 44 Generic alarm delay time after the digital input is not activate 0 250 10 sec 10 sec
Alarm relay
AL 45 Enable alarm relay with unit in off or stand – by:
0= Alarm output not enabled 0 1
1= Alarm output enabled
Password reset: Alarm log – Compressor overload
AL 46 Password value to reset the alarm log, the compressor overload alarm and antifreeze
0 999
alarm
AL 47 Thermal alarm of the compressor
0= lock the compressor 0 1
1= lock the whole circuit
AL 48 Thermal alarm when the compressor is OFF
0 = Not enabled 0 1
1= Alarm enabled
Oil alarm in OFF
AL 49 Oil alarm when the compressor is OFF
0 = Not enabled 0 1
1= Alarm enabled
Generic alarm / signal 2

Pag. 142 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

AL 50 Functioning generic alarm n° 2


0= only signal always automatic reset 0 1
1= the alarm block the unit reset depends on the value of parameter AL51
AL 51 Maximum number of generic alarm events before turning the alarm from automatic to
manual:
Always manual AL51 = 0 0 16
Always automatic AL51 =16
From manual to utomatic if AL51 value is between 1 and 15
AL 52 Generic alarm delay time after the digital input activation 0 250 Sec
AL 53 Generic alarm delay time after the digital input is not activate 0 250 Sec
Reset High pressure / temperature alarm
AL 54 Maximum number of high pressure / temperature alarm events before turning the
alarm from automatic to manual:
Always manual AL54 = 0 0 16
Always automatic AL54 =16
From manual to utomatic if AL54 value is between 1 and 15
Flow alarm condenser
AL 55 “Flow switch water condenser alarm delay after pump activation. 0 250 Sec
AL 56 Maximum time flow switch alarm active befor to block the water pump 0 250 Sec
AL 57 Minimum “Flow switch water condenser active time duration. 0 250 Sec
AL 58 Minimum “Flow switch water condenser not active time duration. 0 250 Sec
High water evaporator inlet temperature
AL 59 Maximum number of high water temperature alarm events
Always manual reset if AL59 = 0
1 16
Always automatic reset if AL59 =16
From automatic to manual reset if AL59 =1..15
AL 60 High water temperature alarm delay time from ON compressor 0 250 Sec 10 sec
AL 61 Set point higt water temperature -30.0 70.0 °C Dec
-22 158 °F int
AL 62 Differential higt water temperature 0.1 25.0 °C Dec
0 45 °F int
AL 63 Analogue input configuration.Allows to select which probe value NTC/PTC (Pb1..Pb10) 1 10
AL 64 Low pressure alarm delay 0 250 Sec
Sanitary water / Solar panel flow switch
AL 65 Sanitary water flow switch alarm delay 0 250 Sec
AL 66 San. water flow switch delay to stop pump 0 250 Sec
AL 67 Sanitary water flow switch activation time 0 250 Sec
AL 68 San. water flow switch de-activation time 0 250 Sec
AL 69 Solar panel flow switch alarm delay 0 250 Sec
AL 70 Solar panel flow switch delay to stop pump 0 250 Sec
AL 71 Solar panel flow switch activation time 0 250 Sec
AL 72 Solar panel flow switch de-activation time 0 250 Sec
Various configurations
AL 73 Max. number per hour sanitary water heaters overload alarm
Always manual if AL73 = 0
Always automatic if AL73 =16
0 16
If 16>AL73>0:
 automatic if number of alarm < AL73
 manual if number of alarm = AL73
AL 74 Password request to reset manual antifreeze alarm
0= password requested 0 1
1= password not requested
AL 75 Max. number per hour sanitary water pump overload
Always manual if AL75 = 0
Always automatic if AL75 =16
0 16
If 16>AL75>0:
 automatic if number of alarm < AL75
 manual if number of alarm = AL75
AL 76 Compressor oil level alarm only signalling
0= automatic / manual reset oil alarm (see AL13) and compressor switch off 0 1
1= oil alarm signal only (compressor stays ON)
AL 77 Compressor overload alarm operation mode
0= always manual reset 0 1
1= always automatic reset
AL 78 0.1 14.0 bar Dec
Dt temperature to generate compressor/circuit differential oil alarm 1 203 psi int
AL 79 0.1 14.0 bar Dec
Differential to reset compressor/circuit differential oil alarm 1 203 psi int
AL 80 Max. number per hour compressor/circuit differential oil alarm
Always manual if AL80 = 0
Always automatic if AL80 =16
0 16
If 16>AL80>0:
 automatic if number of alarm < AL80
 manual if number of alarm = AL80
AL 81 Compressor/circuit differential oil alarm operation mode
0= disabled
0 2
1= enabled for pistons compressors
2= enabled for screw compressors
AL 82 By pass time of the FC flow switch alarm starting from water pump activation 0 250 Sec
AL 83 FC flow switch time activation before blocking FC water pump 0 250 Sec
AL 84 FC flow switch activation time to generate the alarm and block the compressor 0 250 Sec
AL 85 FC flow switch de-activation time to reset the alarm 0 250 Sec

Pag. 143 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

AL 86 Flow switch alarm reset mode


0= Always manual
1= automatic reset after 1 minute
0 250
2= automatic reset after 2 minutes
...
250= automatic reset after 250 minutes
AL 87 Evaporator/sanitary water flow switch by-pass time during Out1 / Out2 commutation 0 250 Sec

Pag. 144 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

51. BLACK-OUT

After the black-out is restored:


1. The instrument resores the same operating mode lost after the supply failure.
2. If active, the defrost is aborted.
3. All the timers and time parameters are reloaded.
4. The manual alarm is not reset.

52. INSTALLING AND MOUNTING

52.1 ICHILL 200 L FORMAT: PANEL CUT- OUT


The instrument must be mounted on vertical panel, with panel cut-out 150x31mm, and screwed 2 screws 
3 x 2mm, in between distance 165mm. The IP65 can be reached with the gasket RG-L (opzionale).
The ambient working temperature range should be between 0÷60°C. Avoid locations subject to heavy
vibration, corrosive gases or excessive dirt. The same applies to the probes. Ensure ventilation around the
instrument.

165
150
31

Ø3 x2

52.2 ICHILL 200 L FORMAT: METAL FRONT FRAME

Pag. 145 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

52.3 ICHILL 200 DIN FORMAT SERIES

IC260D - IC261D (10 DIN modules)


WARNING: all the measure showed in the figure below are expressed in mm.

52.4 VERTICAL BOARDS VI620 – PANEL CUT-OUT


The remote terminals are for panel mounting, panel cut-out 72x56 mm, and screwed with two screws.
The IP65 can be reached with the gasket RGW-V (optional).

WALL MOUNTING: use the vertical V-KIT (black, white and grey) as described in the following scheme:

Pag. 146 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

53. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS


The instrument is provided with:
 3 removable terminal blocks MOLEX with 0.5 mm2 wires: 16 / 8 /22 ways for digital / analogue inputs and
modulating outputs
 4 removable screw terminal block STELVIO for 2.5 mm2 wires connection: 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 ways for the relay
outputs.
 5 ways connector for TTL RS485 interface outputs.
 3 ways connector for keyboard VGI890 (to be connected with cable CABC3J30

The LW30 KIT is the complete kit with MOLEX + 3 mt wires already connected and the STELVIO terminals.

Check the connecitons and the line voltage before turning on the power supply.
Keep low voltage cables far from power cables and terminals to prevent.
Respect the maximum load current of each relay output, in case of power loads use filtered contactors.

54. ACCESSORIES

Monophase fan control: 230vac and cut phase control


Models XV05PK XV10PK XV22PK
Power 500W 1000W 2200W
Ampere 2A 4A 9.5A
Scheme 1 1 1

Pag. 147 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

Power supply
230Vac Input
0 - 230Vac output
-10 - 65°C Operating temperature
Naylon supports
D 15mm
Height
Model XV05PK XV10PK XW22PK
Y 25mm 42mm 64mm
Connections
A 1(+), 2(-) PWM input control
B 3(+), 4(-) PWM output repetition signal
F Phase
N Neutral
5-6 Fan output
Terminals 3 and 4 allows to connect another board in parallel to control two separate fans with the same
input control.
Terminals 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 are for screw for a 2.5mm wire
Terminals 5 / 6 / F / N are 6,3mm faston

Transformer
The standard power supply is 12 volt AC/DC or 24 volt AC/DC (optional)
Trasnformer models: 230/12 Vac , 230 /24 Vac, 110 / 12 Vac, 24 / 12 Vac

Pag. 148 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


1592015820 User manual IC260_261L_D DUO FW1.9 rel. 1.0

55. TECHNICAL DATA


Ichill 260L / Ichill 261L
Housing: self extinguishing ABS.
Case: frontal 185x38 mm; depth 70mm
Mounting: panel mounting in a 150x31mm panel cut-out
Frontal protection: IP65 with gasket

Ichill 260D / Ichill 261D


Housing: self extinguishing ABS.
Case: 10 DIN
Mounting: 10 DIN rail
Index of protection: IP20
Keyboard frontal protection: IP65 with gasket

Display:
Top Display 3 digits with d.p.
Bottom Display 4 digits with d.p.
Connections: Removable screw terminal block 2,5mm2.
Power supply:
12Vac/dc,-10% ÷ l+15% or
24 Vac/dc±10%. 50/60 Hz
Power absorption: 10VA max
Probes: 6 temperature probes (NTC/PTC) + 4 temperature or pressure probes (NTC/PTC/4 ÷ 20ma / 0 ÷
5Volt)
Digital inputs: 18 (free voltage)
Relay outputs: 10 (IC260D/L) or 14 (IC261D/L): SPDT 5(2) A, 250Vac.
Data storing: on the non-volatile memory (EEPROM)
Operating temperature: -10÷55 °C
Storage temperature: -30÷85 °C
Relative humidity: 20 ÷ 85% (no condensing)
Measuring range:
Temperature measured by NTC probe: - 50÷110 °C (-58 ÷ 230 °F)
Temperature measured by PTC probe: -50÷150 °C (-58÷302 °F )
Pressure: 0÷ 50 bar (0÷725 psi)
Resolution: 0,1 °C or 1 °F (selectable)
Accuracy of the controller at 25°C: ±0,7 °C ±1 digit

Pag. 149 of 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like